G1000H™ Integrated Avionics System

Maintenance Manual
Bell 407GX

190-01737-00 March 2014 Revision A

____________________________________________________________________

© Copyright 2014
Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved

Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express
prior written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this
manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be
viewed and to print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic
or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and
provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto
is strictly prohibited.

Garmin International, Inc.

1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: 913-397-8200
Aviation Panel-Mount Technical Support Line (Toll Free): 1-888-606-5482
www.garmin.com

Garmin Ltd. (Europe)

Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p: 44/0870.8501241 f: 44/0870.8501251

Garmin®, FliteCharts® and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries.
Garmin SVT™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.;
Sirius®, XM®, and all associated trademarks or registered trademarks of Sirius XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
©1984–2012.

i
 ____________________________________________________________________

RECORD OF REVISIONS

Revision Date Section Pages Description

1TP 1-14-14 ---- ---- First Draft
2TP 2-7-14 3 3-47 Removed “Select GMA
annunciator and key gain (0.00
- 2.00)” and “Select GMA
annunciator and key offset (-
100 - +100)” from Main Lighting
Configuration Page operations
section.
3-85 Replaced TAWS-B Setup Page
screen shot and description
with HTAWS Setup Page.
4 All Revised entire section to reflect
H version LRUs.
5 All Added software and
configuration files that need to
be reloaded. Also updated
Options List in screen shots to
show proper options.
8 8-9 Revised list showing what
options need enable cards.
8-11 Replaced Transponder
Configuration Page with
Aircraft Configuration Page.
Appendix A A-1 Revised GIA 63H Pin Table to
reflect Bell wiring
configuration.
A-28 Revised GMA 350H Pin Table to
reflect Bell wiring
configuration.
2-11-14 3 3-129 Added note to step 1: NOTE: at
least one of the three tuning
frequencies must be entered in
order to make the COM squelch
and sidetone adjustments; if
not, the fields below
EMERGENCY VOL will not be
displayed.
A 3/21/2014 ---- ---- Production Release

ii
____________________________________________________________________

DOCUMENT PAGINATION

Section Pages
Front Matter i to xii
Section 1 1-1 to 1-4
Section 2 2-1 to 2-18
Section 3 3-1 to 3-156
Section 4 4-1 to 4-18
Section 5 5-1 to 5-46
Section 6 6-1 to 6-32
Section 7 7-1 to 7-2
Section 8 8-1 to 8-28
Appendix A A-1 to A-52
Appendix B B-1 to B-2

This manual reflects the configuration and operation of system software version 1237.07 or later for
the Bell 407GX Helicopter (GDU software version 14.01).
The following are general safety precautions that are not related to any specific procedure and
therefore do not appear elsewhere in this maintenance manual. These are recommended
precautions that personnel should understand and apply during the many phases of maintenance
and repair.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS. Maintenance personnel shall observe all safety regulations at all
times. Turn off the system power before making or breaking electrical connections. Regard any
exposed connector, terminal board, or circuit board as a possible shock hazard. Components that
retain a charge shall be only discharged when such grounding does not result in equipment damage.
If a test connection to energized equipment is required, make the test equipment ground connection
before probing the voltage or signal to be tested.
DO NOT SERVICE ALONE. Personnel shall not under any circumstances reach into or enter any
enclosed spaces for the purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without immediate presence
or assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
“This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations
(“EAR”) issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII Subchapter C) and
which may not be exported, released or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside the United
States without first obtaining an export license. The preceding statement is required to be included
on any and all reproductions in whole or in part of this manual.”

iii
 ____________________________________________________________________

NOTE
All screen displays used in this document serve as a visual reference only. All
information depicted in screen shots, including software version and part numbers is
subject to change and may not be current.

WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This Notice is
being provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any
questions or would like additional information, please refer to the Garmin web site at
www.garmin.com/prop65.

CAUTION
The GDU lamps contain mercury and must be recycled or disposed of according to
local, state, or federal laws. If you have any questions or would like additional
information, please refer to our web site at the following website:
www.garmin.com/aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.

CAUTION
The GDU lens is coated with a special anti-reflective coating which is very sensitive to
skin oils, waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM
THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean,
lint-free cloth and a premium off the shelf LCD screen cleaner that is anti-static,
alcohol and sodium lauryl sulfate free and safe for AR coatings.
NOTE
Procedures given in this manual are for general reference only. Always reference Bell
rotorcraft installation and maintenance data for correct software versions, part
numbers, and procedures for a specific aircraft model when returning an aircraft to
service.

iv
____________________________________________________________________

CONTENTS

SECTION 1 — INTRODUCTION
1.1 Maintenance Concept/Scope ....................................................................1-1
1.2 Applicable Documents ..................................................................1-1
1.2.1 Pilot’s Guide.....................................................................1-1
1.2.2 Garmin Installation Manuals ...............................................1-1
1.3 Manual Organization ..............................................................................1-2
1.4 Limited Warranty ...................................................................................1-3
SECTION 2 — G1000H DESCRIPTION
2.1 Line Replaceable Unit Descriptions ..........................................................2-2
2.1.1 GDU 1040H Primary Flight Display/Multi Function Display ............2-2
2.1.2 GMA 350H Audio Panel ............................................................2-2
2.1.3 GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit ..............................................2-3
2.1.4 GDC 74H Air Data Computer (ADC) ............................................2-3
2.1.5 GEA 71H Engine Airframe Unit ..................................................2-4
2.1.6 GTX 33H/ES Transponder ..........................................................2-5
2.1.7 GRS 77H AHRS and GMU 44 Magnetometer ...............................2-5
2.1.7.1 GRS 77H ...................................................................2-5
2.1.7.2 GMU 44 ....................................................................2-6
2.1.8 Data Link Units .......................................................................2-6
2.1.8.1 GDL 69AH XM Satellite Weather and Radio ...................2-6
2.1.8.2 GDL 59H FDR Interface and Wi-Fi Datalink ....................2-7
2.1.9 GTS 800 TAS .........................................................................2-8
2.1.10 GSR 56 Satellite Radio / Iridium Transceiver ..............................2-9
2.1.11 GTP 59 OAT Probe .................................................................2-9
2.1.12 GA 36 and GA 37 Antennas ...................................................2-10
2.1.13 GSC 46 Signal Conditioner .....................................................2-10
2.2 System Controls...................................................................................2-11
2.2.1 PFD Controls ..........................................................................2-11
2.2.2 GMA 350H Controls ................................................................2-13
2.2.3 Softkeys .................................................................................2-15
2.3 Secure Digital Cards .............................................................................2-15
2.4 System Power-Up ................................................................................2-16
2.5 System Operation ................................................................................2-17

v
 ____________________________________________________________________

2.5.1 Normal Display Operation ........................................................2-17

2.5.2 Reversionary Display Operation .................................................2-18
SECTION 3 — TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
3.1 Troubleshooting Methods ........................................................................3-1
3.2 Visual Hardware Inspection .....................................................................3-3
3.3 Invalid Display Fields/Associated LRUs .....................................................3-3
3.1 Invalid Display Field Troubleshooting Tables ....................................3-5
3.4 System Message Advisories ...................................................................3-12
3.4.1 GDU 1040H Message Advisories ..............................................3-12
3.4.2 GMA 350H Message Advisories ................................................3-24
3.4.3 GSR 56H Message Advisories...................................................3-25
3.4.4 GDL 59H Message Advisories ...................................................3-25
3.4.4.1 Activation Of Garmin Flight Data Services .....................3-26
3.4.5 COM Message Advisories .........................................................3-27
3.4.6 NAV Message Advisories ..........................................................3-28
3.4.7 Glideslope Advisories ...............................................................3-28
3.4.8 GPS Message Advisories ..........................................................3-29
3.4.9 GIA Configuration Message Advisories........................................3-30
3.4.10 GRS 77H Message Advisories ...................................................3-31
3.4.11 GMU 44 Message Advisories ....................................................3-32
3.4.12 GTX 33H Message Advisories ...................................................3-33
3.4.13 GDL 69AH Message Advisories .................................................3-34
3.4.14 GDC 74H Message Advisories .................................................3-35
3.4.15 GTS 800 Message Advisories ..................................................3-35
3.4.16 GEA 71H Message Advisories ..................................................3-37
3.4.17 GMA 350H Message Advisories ...............................................3-38
3.5 Data Path Troubleshooting ...................................................................3-39
3.5.1 Data Path Troubleshooting Table ..............................................3-41
3.6 Troubleshooting Using Configuration Pages .............................................3-42
3.6.1 Indications And Definitions .......................................................3-42
3.6.2 Placing The G1000H in Configuration Mode ...................3-43
3.6.3 Configuration Page Security ......................................................3-43
3.6.3 Configuration Page Groups And Descriptions ..............................3-43

vi
____________________________________________________________________

3.6.4 Configuration Page Groups And Descriptions ..............................3-44

3.6.4.1 System Page Group ................................................3-45
3.6.4.2 GDU Page Group ....................................................3-68
3.6.4.3 GIA Page Group .....................................................3-87
3.6.4.4 GEA Page Group.....................................................3-96
3.6.4.5 GTX Page Group ...................................................3-104
3.6.4.6 GRS Page Group ..................................................3-107
3.6.4.7 ADC Page Group ..................................................3-110
3.6.4.8 GMA Page Group ..................................................3-112
3.6.4.9 GDL Page Group ..................................................3-118
3.6.4.10 GTS Page Group ...................................................3-126
3.6.4.11 Other Page Group .................................................3-128
3.7 Additional Troubleshooting ..................................................................3-129
3.7.1 COM ...................................................................................3-129
3.7.2 GPS Troubleshooting .............................................................3-131
3.7.3 GDC 74H Troubleshooting .....................................................3-135
3.7.4 GRS 77 AHRS and GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting ......3-136
3.7.4.1 AHRS Troubleshooting Table ..................................3-138
3.7.4.2 GRS 77H Operational Modes .................................3-139
3.7.4.3 GRS 77H Pitch/Bank Limits For Cold Start Airborne ..3-139
3.7.4.4 GRS 77H Troubleshooting Questions.......................3-140
3.7.4.5 GRS Troubleshooting On The Aircraft ......................3-141
3.7.4.6 GMU 44 Magnetometer- Heading Red X ..................3-143
3.7.4.7 GMU Communications ..........................................3-143
3.7.4.8 GRS 77H Calibration Message ...............................3-143
3.7.4.9 GRS/GMU Calibration ...........................................3-144
3.7.5 GDL 69AH Troubleshooting ....................................................3-144
3.7.5.1 GDL 69AH Error Messages ....................................3-144
3.7.5.2 GDL 69AH Common Faults....................................3-145
3.7.6 GMA 350H Audio Panel Troubleshooting .................................3-146
3.7.6.1 GMA 350H 3D Audio Troubleshooting ....................3-147
3.7.6.2 3D AUDIO (GMA 350H ONLY) ...............................3-147
3.7.6.3 Enabling 3D AUDIO ..............................................3-148

vii
 ____________________________________________________________________

3.7.7 GDU 1040H Troubleshooting ..................................................3-149

3.7.8 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) Troubleshooting ....................3-152
3.7.9 Garmin Connext Weather Data Troubleshooting .........................3-153
3.7.10 STORMSCOPE® Troubleshooting ............................................3-154
3.7.11 Maintenance Logs ..................................................................3-154
3.7.12 Assert Logs ...........................................................................3-155
3.8 LRU External Connector Information .....................................................3-156
SECTION 4 — LRU REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
4.1 GDC 74H Air Data Computer ..................................................................4-2
4.2 GDL 59H Data Link ...............................................................................4-2
4.3 GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver ....................................................4-2
4.4 GDU 1040H MFD and PFD ....................................................................4-3
4.5 GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Unit ................................................................4-4
4.5.1 GEA 71H Backshell Thermocouple ..............................................4-4
4.6 GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit ............................................................4-6
4.7 GMA 350H Audio Panel .........................................................................4-8
4.8 GRS 77 AHRS AND GMU 44 Magnetometer .............................................4-9
4.9 GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver ................................................................4-10
4.10 GTP 59 OAT Probe ..............................................................................4-11
4.11 GTS 800 TAS ......................................................................................4-12
4.12 GTX 33H Transponder ..........................................................................4-13
4.13 Configuration Module ...........................................................................4-15
4.13.1 Configuration Module Checkout ..............................................4-16
4.14 GSC 46 Signal Conditioner ....................................................................4-17

viii
____________________________________________________________________

SECTION 5— LOADING LRU SOFTWARE

5.1 General Information................................................................................5-1
5.2 Crossfill Monitoring System .....................................................................5-2
5.3 Clearing User Settings ............................................................................5-5
5.4 LRU Software Loading Procedures ...........................................................5-6
5.4.1 GDU 1040H Displays................................................................5-6
5.4.2 GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit ...............................................5-9
5.4.3 GMA 350H Audio Panel ..........................................................5-11
5.4.4 GRS 77H AHRS and GMU 44 Magnetometer .............................5-15
5.4.4.1 GRS 77H ..............................................................5-15
5.4.4.2 GMU 44................................................................5-17
5.4.5 GDC 74H Air Data Computer....................................................5-20
5.4.6 GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Interface Unit ....................................5-23
5.4.7 GTX 33H Transponder .............................................................5-26
5.4.8 GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver (Optional Equipment) ....................5-29
5.4.9 Standalone GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver (Optional Equipment) ....5-32
5.4.10 GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver (Optional Equipment) .......5-35
5.4.11 GTS 800 TAS .........................................................................5-38
5.4.12 GDL 59H Data Link (Optional Equipment)..................................5-41
5.4.13 GSC 46 Signal Conditioner .......................................................5-44
SECTION 6―TESTING AND CALIBRATION
6.1 GDU 1040H MFD/PFD Testing................................................................6-1
6.2 GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit Testing .................................................6-1
6.2.1 GPS Signal Acquisition Test........................................................6-1
6.2.1.1 GPS Satellite Signal Strengths ...................................6-2
6.2.1.2 VHF COM Interference Test ........................................6-2
6.2.1.3 VOR/LOC/GS Test .....................................................6-3
6.3 GMA 350H Audio Panel Testing ..............................................................6-4
6.3.1 Verify Failsafe Operation With Mono Headset ...............................6-4
6.3.2 Verify Installed Transceivers Are Able to Transmit And Receive........6-4
6.3.3 Verify Audio From Installed Receiver And Alert Sources ..................6-4
6.3.4 Verify Speaker Output (If Installed) ..............................................6-5

ix
 ____________________________________________________________________

6.3.5 Verify ICS (Intercom System) Operation........................................6-5

6.3.6 Verify Telephone And Music Operation (If Installed) .......................6-5
6.3.7 Marker Beacon Operation (If Installed) .........................................6-5
6.4 GDC 74H Testing ..................................................................................6-6
6.4.1 Preparing the System For Part 43 Appendix E Testing....................6-6
6.4.2 Airspeed Test ...........................................................................6-7
6.4.4 OAT Probe Test ........................................................................6-7
6.4.5 Second OAT Probe Test in Dual ADC Installations .........................6-7
6.5 GEA 71H Testing ...................................................................................6-8
6.6 GTX 33H Transponder Testing .................................................................6-8
6.6.1 Self Test ..................................................................................6-8
6.6.2 Altitude Input ...........................................................................6-8
6.6.3 External Inputs .........................................................................6-8
6.6.4 Performance (Ramp) Test ..........................................................6-8
6.7 GDL 69AH Testing .................................................................................6-9
6.8 GSR 56H Testing.................................................................................6-10
6.9 GTS 800 TAS Testing ...........................................................................6-11
6.9.1 Ground Test ...........................................................................6-11
6.9.2 System Test Mode...................................................................6-12
6.10 GRS 77H AHRS Testing .......................................................................6-13
6.11 GDL 59H Testing .................................................................................6-13
6.12 Calibration Procedures ..........................................................................6-15
6.12.1 GEA 71H High-Side Current Monitor Calibration Procedure ........6-15
6.12.2 GRS 77H/GMU 44 Calibration Procedure .................................6-17
6.12.2.1 Procedure A1: Pitch/Roll Offset Calibration ............6-19
6.12.2.2 Procedure B: Magnetometer Calibration ................6-20
6.12.2.3 Procedure D: Engine Run-Up Vibration Test ............6-23
6.12.2.4 Procedure E: Magnetometer Interference Test..........6-24
6.13 GDC 74H Field Calibration Utility ..........................................................6-27
6.13.1 Limitations ...........................................................................6-27
6.13.2 Requirements .......................................................................6-27
6.13.3 Software Installation ..............................................................6-28
6.13.4 Procedure ............................................................................6-28
6.13.5 To Restore Original Calibration (If Needed) ...............................6-31
x
____________________________________________________________________

6.13.6 Calibration File Storage ..........................................................6-32

6.13.7 Software Version ...................................................................6-32
SECTION 7―PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
7.1 Conditional Maintenance.........................................................................7-1
7.2 Pitot/Static Leak Test..............................................................................7-1
7.3 Altimeter (GDC 74H and PFD).................................................................7-1
7.4 Airspeed Function Test (GDC 74H and PFD) .............................................7-1
7.5 Vertical Speed Indicator (GDC 74H and PFD) ............................................7-1
7.6 GTX 33H Transponder ............................................................................7-1
7.7 GRS 77H Earth Magnetic Field Updates ...................................................7-1
7.8 GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver ....................................................7-1
SECTION 8—G1000H SOFTWARE LOADING AND CONFIGURATION
8.1 System Software Loading Overview ..........................................................8-1
8.2 System Software Loading Procedure .........................................................8-2
8.2.1 Software Part Numbers ..............................................................8-2
8.2.2 System Power Up .....................................................................8-2
8.2.3 Cooling Fan Check ....................................................................8-2
8.2.4 Loading MFD And PFD Software .................................................8-2
8.2.5 Crossfill Monitoring System ........................................................8-3
8.2.5.1 Crossfill Troubleshooting ............................................8-5
8.2.6 Clearing User Settings ...............................................................8-6
8.3 Loading System Software ........................................................................8-7
8.4 Installing Optional Equipment .................................................................8-9
8.5 Enabling Options ...................................................................................8-9
8.6 Final Configuration Items ......................................................................8-11
8.6.1 Aircraft Registration Number Entry ............................................8-11
8.7 Software Load Confirmation .................................................................8-13
8.8 Updating the Configuration Module ........................................................8-14
8.9 Database Card Loading Procedure ..........................................................8-15
8.9.1 Jeppesen Databases ................................................................8-15
8.9.2 Dual Navigation Database Feature .............................................8-17
8.10 Software/Configuration Troubleshooting ..................................................8-26

xi
 ____________________________________________________________________

APPENDIX A —LRU CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS

A.1 GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit ............................................................A-1
A.2 GDU 1040H PFD/MFD.........................................................................A-15
A.3 GRS 77H AHRS ..................................................................................A-22
A.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer ........................................................................A-23
A.5 GDC 74H Air Data Computer ................................................................A-24
A.6 GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Unit ..............................................................A-26
A.7 GMA 350H Audio Panel .......................................................................A-30
A.8 GTX 33H/ES Transponders ....................................................................A-39
A.9 GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver ..................................................A-41
A.10 GTS 800 TAS .....................................................................................A-43
A.11 GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver ................................................................A-48
A.12 GDL 59H Data Link Unit ......................................................................A-50
A.13 GSC 46 Signal Conditioner (SANDIA ST 32) ............................................A-52
APPENDIX B — AFM/AFMS/POH CONSIDERATIONS
B.1 Garmin GNSS (GPS/SBAS) Navigation System Equipment Approvals ........... B-1
B.2 Garmin GNSS (GPS/SBAS) Navigation System Limitations.......................... B-2

xii
SECTION 1 — INTRODUCTION

NOTE
This manual reflects the operation of system software version 1237.07 or later for the Bell
407GX Helicopter. Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the
information in this manual to earlier or later software versions. Always refer to approved Bell
specific information before performing maintenance. Always use approved Bell documents
for helicopter checkouts.
NOTE
All visual depictions in this manual, including screen images of the G1000H displays, are
subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and navigation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE
The technician should be familiar with the system description and operating information in
Section 2 before performing maintenance.
1.1 MAINTENANCE CONCEPT/SCOPE
Performing maintenance on the G1000H consists of the following:
• Fault detection and isolation at the line replaceable unit level.
• Removing and replacing a faulty LRU.
• Installing and configuring system level and individual LRU level software.
• Performing periodic system maintenance procedures.
• Performing return to service tests.
There is no component level repair on any part of the system or any repair of an individual LRU. This manual
contains no schematic diagrams. No special tools or equipment are needed to perform maintenance.
1.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 Pilot’s Guide
• Bell 407GX Pilot’s Guide, Part Number 190-01255-00
1.2.2 Garmin Installation Manuals
• GDU 1040H Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD): 190-00303-01
• GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit: 190-00303-05
• GDC 74H Air Data Computer (ADC): 190-00303-15
• GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Unit: 190-00303-40
• GSC 46 Signal Conditioner: (Sandia Corp. P/N 305952-00-IM)
• GRS 77H Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS): 190-00303-10

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 1-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
 • GMU 44 Magnetometer: 190-00303-10
• GMA 350H Audio System with Integrated Marker Beacon Receiver: 190-01134-11
• GTX 33H Mode S Transponder with extended squitter: 190-00303-61
• GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver: 190-00355-02
• GDL 59H Data Link: 190-00837-00
• GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver: 190-00836-00
• GTS 800 Traffic Avoidance System: 190-00587-00
• GA 58 Directional Antenna: 190-00587-20
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe: 190-00313-00
• GA 36 GPS/WAAS and GA 37 GPS/WAAS/XM Antennas: 190-00848-00
1.3 MANUAL ORGANIZATION
Section 1 gives introductory manual information. Section 2 provides a description of the G1000H. Section 3
contains troubleshooting information. Section 4 describes how to remove and replace a faulty LRU. Section 5
explains how to load individual LRU software. Section 6 describes return to service test procedures. Section 7
contains G1000H periodic maintenance requirements. Section 8 describes how to load G1000H software.
Appendix A contains LRU external connector pin names and numbers. Appendix B contains pertinent AFM,
AFMS, and/or POH information as it relates to the G1000H.

Page 1-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
1.4 LIMITED WARRANTY
All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for: two years
from the date of purchase for new Remote-Mount and Panel-Mount products; one year from the date of
purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly-overhauled products; six months for newly-
overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center; and 90 days for factory repaired
or newly-overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair. Within the applicable period, Garmin
will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement
will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible
for any transportation cost. This warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks
and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in
materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or other acts of
nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized
service provider of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written
permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or
services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IN NO EVENT
SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN
THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair
or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product or software or offer a full
refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
Online Auction Purchases: Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for warranty
coverage. Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty
service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required. Garmin will not replace
missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
International Purchases: A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices
purchased outside the United States depending on the country. If applicable, this warranty is provided by the
local in-country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device. Distributor warranties
are only valid in the area of intended distribution. Devices purchased in the United States or Canada must be
returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom, the United States, Canada, or Taiwan for
service.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 1-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Blank Page

Page 1-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
SECTION 2 — G1000H DESCRIPTION

The G1000H is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The G1000H
installed in the Bell 407GX consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1040H Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit
• GDC 74H Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Unit
• GSC 46 Signal Conditioner
• GRS 77H Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GMA 350H Audio System with Integrated Marker Beacon Receiver
• GTX 33H Mode S Transponder with extended squitter
• GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver (optional)
• GDL 59H Data Link (optional)
• GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver (optional)
• GTS 800 Traffic Avoidance System (optional)
• GA 58 Directional Antenna (optional)
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
• GA 36 GPS/WAAS and GA 37 GPS/WAAS/XM Antennas
NOTE
A simplified G1000H block diagram is shown in Section 3.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
2.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS
2.1.1 GDU 1040H Primary Flight Display/Multi Function Display
One unit is configured as a PFD, the other as an MFD, each featuring a 10.4-inch LCD with 1024 x 768
resolution. The unit installed on the right/pilot side is designated as the PFD, and the one installed on the
left/copilot side is designated as the MFD. These units communicate with each other and with the on-side GIA
63H Integrated Avionics Unit through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.

Figure 2-1. GDU 1040H

2.1.2 GMA 350H Audio Panel
The GMA 350H integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls. This unit
communicates with both GIA 63Hs, using an RS-232 digital interface.

Figure 2-2. GMA 350H Audio Panel

Page 2-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
2.1.3 GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit
This LRU functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the on-side PFD. Each GIA 63H
contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system integration
microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with a respective GDU 1040H via HSDB connection. The GIA 63Hs are
not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.

Figure 2-3. GIA 63H IAU

2.1.4 GDC 74H Air Data Computer (ADC)
This LRU processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe. This unit provides pressure
altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the G1000H system, and it communicates with the
each GIA 63H, GDU 1040H and GRS 77H, using an ARINC 429 digital interface (it also interfaces directly with
the GTP 59). The GDC 74H is designed to operate in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) airspace.

Figure 2-4. GDC 74H Air Data Computer

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
2.1.5 GEA 71H Engine Airframe Unit
This LRU receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates with
both GIA 63Hs using an RS-485 digital interface.

Figure 2-5. GEA 71H Engine Airframe Unit

Page 2-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
2.1.6 GTX 33H/ES Transponder
The GTX 33H/ES is a solid-state, Mode-S transponder that provides Modes A, C and S operation. The unit is
controlled through the PFD and communicates with both GIA 63Hs through an RS-232 digital interface.
Extended Squitter (ES) provides ADS-B output.

Figure 2-6. GTX 3H/ES Transponder

2.1.7 GRS 77H Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) and GMU 44 Magnetometer
2.1.7.1 GRS 77H
This LRU provides helicopter attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both GDU 1040H units and
the both GIA 63H units. The GRS 77H contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors)
and interfaces with the GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information, with the GDC 74H to obtain air data, and
with both GIA 63Hs to obtain GPS information. AHRS modes of operation are discussed later in this document.

Figure 2-7. GRS 77H AHRS

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-5

190-01737-00 Revision A
2.1.7.2 GMU 44

Figure 2-8. GMU 44 Magnetometer

This LRU measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS 77H for processing to determine helicopter
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77H and communicates with the GRS 77H,
using an RS-485 digital interface.
2.1.8 Data Link Units
2.1.8.1 69AH XM Satellite Weather and Radio
The GDL 69AH is a satellite radio receiver that provides real-time weather information to the G1000H MFD
(and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69AH
communicates with the MFD via HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is required
to enable the GDL 69AH capability.

Figure 2-9. GDL 69AH Satellite Weather and Radio

Page 2-6 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
2.1.8.2 GDL 59H FDR Interface and Wi-Fi Datalink
The GDL 59H provides a POTS (plain old telephone service) phone interface, a flight parameter data logger,
and a high speed data link between the aircraft systems and ground computers while the aircraft is on the
ground using the IEEE 802.11g (“Wi-Fi”) protocol. The GDL 59H also provides two interfaces to an optional GSR
56, which adds airborne low speed data link and voice communication capability.

Figure 2-10. GDL 59H FDR Interface and Wi-Fi Datalink

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-7

190-01737-00 Revision A
2.1.9 GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
The GTS 800 is a microprocessor-based Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) that uses active interrogations of Mode S
(GTS 820 and GTS 850 only) and Mode C transponders to provide Traffic Advisories to the pilot. The GTS 820
and GTS 850 include a GPA 65 power amplifier/low-noise amplifier (PA/LNA) module, which allows for up to 40
nm of active surveillance range. When installed with a 1090 MHz ADS-B transmit class of equipment the GTS
800 also utilizes passive surveillance. Traffic is displayed on an external MFD via ARINC 429 and/or Ethernet
High Speed Data Bus (HSDB). An aural alert is also provided to inform the crew a traffic advisory (TA) will be
displayed.

Figure 2-11. GTS 800 TAS

Page 2-8 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
2.1.10 GSR 56H Satellite Radio / Iridium Transceiver
The GSR 56H provides airborne low speed data link and voice communication capability to Garmin Integrated
Flight Deck installations. The GSR 56H contains a transceiver that operates on the Iridium Satellite network..

Figure 2-12. GSR 56 Satellite Radio/Iridium Transceiver

2.1.11 GTP 59 Outside Temperature Probe
The Temperature Probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the primary GDC 74H.

Figure 2-13. GTP 59 OAT Probe

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-9

190-01737-00 Revision A
2.1.12 GA 36 and GA 37 Antennas
The GA 36 is a through-mount GPS/SBAS antenna. The GA 37 is a through-mount GPS/SBAS antenna with
XM/Data Link. The GA 36 is a through-mount GPS/SBAS antenna. The GA 37 is a through-mount GPS/SBAS
antenna with XM/Data Link.

GA 36 GA 37
2.1.13 GSC 46 Signal Conditioner
The Signal Conditioning Unit supplies engine data to the GEAs. The unit is connected to the GEA via a digital
connection.

Page 2-10 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
2.2 G1000H CONTROLS
The G1000H system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the
PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.

Figure 2-14. PFD/MFD Controls

2.2.1 PFD Controls

The following list describes the controls located on the PFD bezel (see Figure 2-14).

1 NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage).
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF.

2 NAV Frequency Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.

Transfer Key

3 NAV Knob Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2.

4 Heading Knob Turn to manually select a heading. Press to display a digital heading momentarily to
the left of the HSI and synchronize the Selected Heading to the and current heading.

5 Joystick Turn to change map range. Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-11

190-01737-00 Revision A
 6 CRS/BARO Knob Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting. Turn small knob to adjust
course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode). Press to re-center the CDI and return
course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/station.

7 COM Knob Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2. The selected COM
(green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).

8 COM Frequency Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold two seconds to tune
Transfer Key the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.
(EMERG)

9 COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency
Box). Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF.

10 Direct-to Key Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and
establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen
from the active route).

11 FPL Key Displays flight plan information.

12 CLR Key Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus. Press and hold to display the
(DFLT MAP) MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).

13 MENU Key Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes.

14 PROC Key Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport.

15 ENT Key Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry.

16 FMS Knob Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF. Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter
(Flight data in the highlighted field (large knob moves cursor location; small knob selects
Management character for highlighted cursor location). Scrolling: When a list of information is too
System Knob) long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears, indicating more items to view. With
cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list. Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD
to select the page to view (large knob selects a page group; small knob selects a
specific page from the group).

17 Softkey Selection Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display.
Keys

18 ALT Knob Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds).

Page 2-12 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
2.2.2 GMA 350H Audio Panel Controls

Figure 2-15. GMA 350H Audio Panel Controls

NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.

1. MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon
receiver audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker
beacon signal is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
2. COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to
enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
3. COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to
enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
4. COM3 – When selected, audio from the #3 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to
enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
5. NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
6. AUX – When selected, audio from the AUX inputs can be heard.
7. MUSIC/PHONE SYMBOL - Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device
connected to the Front Panel Jack. Audio from a telephone device connected to the rear of the audio
panel is used if a device is not connected to the Front Panel Jack. Press and hold to enable/disable
muting during reception.
8. MUSIC – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUSIC
muting during reception.
9. MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, squelch is controlled manually.
10. Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
11. Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12. MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this
key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 or COM3 receive
can be added by pressing the COM2 or COM3 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-
COM mode (using COM1/COM2 or COM1/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower
numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-13
190-01737-00 Revision A
 13. MIC2 – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this
key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 or COM3 receive
can be added by pressing the COM1 or COM3 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-
COM mode (using COM1/COM2 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower
numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
14. MIC3 – Selects the #3 transmitter for transmitting. COM3 receive is simultaneously selected when this
key is pressed allowing received audio from the #3 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 or COM2 receive
can be added by pressing the COM1 or COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-
COM mode (using COM1/COM3 or COM2/COM3). When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using the lower
numbered COM, the copilot is using the higher numbered COM.
15. NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
16. PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle 3D audio on/off for all headset
positions.
17. COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot configuration
between crew and passenger.
18. PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger muting
during reception.
19. SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, AUX, and MKR receiver audio can be
heard on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes
during PA.
20. Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing green or blue annunciator) to the
desired source.
21. Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected
source (indicated by the flashing green or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not
active press to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to
cancel the cursor, twice to activate Blue-Select mode).

Page 2-14 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
2.2.3 Softkeys
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level or
page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the
softkey label is subdued (dimmed). Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. For
detailed information on the operation of the softkeys see the 407GX pilot’s guide.

Figure 2-16. Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)

2.3 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. The system uses SD cards to store
databases (such as terrain or charts), in addition to loading software updates, and to allow for the import or
export of data including flight plans, pilot profiles, and flight data logs.
Install an SD card:

x Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of
the card should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card:
x Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.

Figure 2-17. Display Bezel SD Card Slots

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-15
190-01737-00 Revision A
2.4 SYSTEM POWER-UP
The G1000H is integrated with the helicopter electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The G1000H PFD, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in
test features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 2-18. ALTN is also displayed
on the Power Situation Indicator and Torque will be marked QA. All system annunciations should disappear
typically within one minute of power-up at normal temperature, but may take as long as 10 minutes at cold
temperatures. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become momentarily illuminated on the audio
panels, the control units and the display bezels.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up (Figure 2-17), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
• System version
• Copyright
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database information
• Terrain database name and version
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Navigation database name, version, and effective dates
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Pilot Profile selection
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted
to continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the Auxiliary (AUX) Weight
Planning Page.

Page 2-16 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 2-18. MFD Power Up Page Figure 2-19. PFD Initilization
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, it
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. Each IAU is
connected to a single display. This allows the units to share information, enabling true system
integration.This section discusses normal and reversionary G1000H display operation, as well as the various
AHRS modes and G1000H System Annunciations.
2.5.1 Normal Display Operation
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The Power Situation Indicator and CAS messages are also displayed on the PFD.
The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see the Flight Management
Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EICAS; see the EICAS
Section).
Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 2-17

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Figure 2-20. Normal Mode
2.5.2 Reversionary Display Operation
NOTE: The G1000H System alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to Appendix A of
the 407GX pilot’s guide for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
In the event of a display failure, the G1000H System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU Ethernet interface to the display is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display, and the NAV and COM functions provided to the failed display by
the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup paths for the AHRS, ADC,
Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is completely automated
for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.

Figure 2-21. Reversionary Mode

If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
red DU BACKUP Button on the instrument panel. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.

Page 2-18 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
SECTION 3―TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

This section describes various troubleshooting methods to help detect and isolate an LRU/system fault.
Recommended actions to take to correct a fault are also given.
NOTE
If the PFD, MFD, GIA1 or GIA2 configuration files are loaded during troubleshooting, any
optional equipment files for equipment installed in the helicopter must also be loaded (see
Section 5). Failure to reload the optional configuration files may deactivate the equipment.
Be sure to note any optional equipment installed (by pre-inspection or by logbook entry)
before loading PFD/MFD and/or GIA 1/2 configuration files.
3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING METHODS
The following troubleshooting methods are covered in this section:
• Visual Hardware Inspection
• Invalid Display Fields/Associated LRUs
• System Message Advisories
• Data Path Troubleshooting
• Troubleshooting Using Configuration Pages
• Additional Troubleshooting:
 COM Transceivers

 GPS Receivers
 GDC 74H Air Data Computer
 GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
 GRS 77H AHRS/GMU 44 Magnetometer
 GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver
 GMA 350H Audio Panel

 GDU 1040H Displays

 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
 Garmin Connext Weather Data
 Stormscope

 Maintenance Logs

 Assert Logs
 LRU External Connector Information

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Ring Audio

GDL 69AH GSR 56H

(XM Weather / (Iridium
Audio) Datalink)
Audio
232

GDL 59H Analog Audio

GTS 800 (Wi-Fi Datalink and
(TAS) Storage)
HSDB

HSDB HSDB

GDU 1040 GDU 1040

(Primary Flight (Multi Function
Display) Display)

Display
Reversion
Switch 429 HSDB
429

HSDB Marker
Beacon
Antenna

GMA 347H
(Audio Panel)
232

CVR

429
GDC 74H
429 (Air Data 429

232 Computer)

GMU 44
(Magnetometer) 429 GTP 59
(Outside Air Temp)
232
485
GIA 63H GIA 63H
(Integrated 429
(Integrated
Avionics Unit) GRS 77H 232 Avionics Unit)
429 (Attitude and 429

232 Heading) 232

Stormscope 232

RAD ALT 429

Antennas:
Antennas: Analog
COM
COM ADF Audio
NAV
NAV Analog
GPS DME Audio
GPS
WAAS
ELT 429 WAAS

GTX 33H/ES
232 232
Transponder

GEA 71H
485 485
(Engine & Airframe I/O)

Standard Garmin Non-Garmin Equipment

Equipment Sourced by OEM
GSC 46
Optional Garmin Signal
Equipment Conditioner

Figure 3-1. G1000H Simplified Block Diagram

Page 3-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 NOTE
Make sure no cell phones or devices using cell phone technology are turned on in the during
troubleshooting.
NOTE
In addition to the methods listed in this section, the testing procedures in Section 6 can be
used to troubleshoot the system.
3.2 VISUAL HARDWARE INSPECTION
Begin troubleshooting with a visual inspection of the system. Check for corrosion, damage, or other faults.
Replace any damaged parts as required. Inspection may require the temporary removal of an LRU to gain
access to connectors. Section 4 contains LRU removal and installation procedures. Refer to Bell rotorcraft
maintenance documentation for instructions on LRU access locations.
3.3 INVALID DISPLAY FIELDS/ASSOCIATED LRUs
Invalidation is the marking of a display field when its sensed value is unavailable, unreliable, or failed due to
wiring disconnect, power removal, and/or sensor (LRU) failure. An example of an invalidated parameter
includes a removal of data and red-X’ing of the attitude sphere when an AHRS fails. Uninitialized data is a
valid status of an indication when a parameter, computation, or sensor is behaving normally, but whose
contents are uninitialized given a lack of user or external input. An example of uninitialized data from user
input is the altitude select value on the PFD upon power-up. An example of uninitialized data from a sensor
input is a DME distance that cannot be determined since a signal is out of range from the sensing receiver. A
red X is used for invalidation markings. Dashes or underscores are typically used for uninitialized data.
Upon system power-up, certain display fields remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. Everything
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any display field remains flagged, begin
troubleshooting using the methods listed in Section 3.1 and the information in Section 3.3.1.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Figure 3-1. Invalid Display Fields/Associated LRUs

Page 3-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.3.1 Invalid Display Field Troubleshooting Tables
The following tables list invalid display fields, associated LRUs, and recommended corrective actions.

Invalid Display Field Associated Corrective Actions

LRU
NAV1 or COM1 1. Check PFD Alert Window for GIA1 configuration,
software or failed data path error messages.
Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Swap GIA1 and GIA2 and reconfigure for their new
positions to verify location of the problem. If
problem follows GIA1, replace GIA1.
GIA 63H
Integrated 3. Check configuration settings for GIA1 and the PFD.
Avionics Reconfigure if necessary.
Unit #1
4. Check Ethernet interconnect from GIA1 to the PFD
and unit connector pins for faults. If problem
persists, replace the PFD.
5. Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location of problem.
If problem follows GIA1, replace GIA1. If problem
persists, replace the PFD.
NAV2 or COM2 1. Check PFD Alert Window for GIA2 configuration,
software or failed data path error messages.
Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Swap GIA1 and GIA2 and reconfigure for their new
positions to verify location of problem. If problem
GIA 63H follows GIA2, replace the GIA2.
Integrated
3. Check configuration settings for GIA2 and the MFD.
Avionics
Unit #2 4. Check Ethernet interconnect from GIA2 to the MFD
and unit connector for faults. If problem persists,
replace the MFD.
5. Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location of problem.
If problem follows GIA2, replace the GIA2. If
problem persists, replace the MFD.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-5

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Invalid Display Field Associated Corrective Actions
LRU
GPS LOI or Time 1. Check PFD Alert Window for GIA1/2 configuration,
software or failed data path error messages.
Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Verify the helicopter is located where the GPS
antennas have a clear view of the sky.
3. Check for possible external interference to the GPS
receivers.
4. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell
phone technology is not turned on (even in a
monitoring state) in the cabin.
5. Turn to the MFD AUX – GPS STATUS page and
GIA 63H check the GPS strength bars on both GPS receivers.
Integrated If the signal strength levels are erratic, disappear
Avionics and reappear rapidly, or switch between a solid
Unit #1 or and hollow bar frequently there is an external
#2 device interfering with the GPS receivers. Turn off
any devices that radiate a signal in the local area or
move the helicopter to another location to remove
the interference.
6. Verify the helicopter is not parked in close
proximity to a hanger with the doors open and
equipped with a GPS repeater.
7. Verify the GIA’s are online by checking for a green
checkmark next to the GIA on the MFD Aux –
System Status page. If a GIA is not online (a Red-X
will be present instead of a green check mark),
check for power input faults. Refer to the GPS
Troubleshooting Section for additional actions.

Page 3-6 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Invalid Display Field Associated Corrective Actions
LRU
XPDR FAIL 1. Check PFD Alert Window for GIA1/2 and GTX 33H
configuration, software or failed data path error
messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the
GTX Transponder Configuration page.
3. For GTX 33H transponders verify the helicopter
registration is entered in the GTX Transponder
Configuration page.
4. Verify the green check is in the box located in the
“LRU Configuration Status” on the Aircraft
GTX 33H Configuration Page. If not, reconfigure the
transponder. If problem persists, replace the
transponder.

5. Verify helicopter registration and ICAO addresses

are present on the Aircraft Configuration Page.
6. Check the GIA and GTX racks for connector pin
faults (push-back or bent) on the RS-232
interconnect lines.
7. Replace the GTX 33H.
TAS, AIRSPEED FAIL, 1. Check PFD Alert Window for PFD, MFD or GDC
ALTITUDE FAIL, configuration, software or failed data path error
VERT SPEED FAIL messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Verify the GDC is online by checking for a green
checkmark next to the GDC on the MFD Aux –
System Status page.
GDC 74H Air 3. If the GDC is not online (a Red-X will be present
Data instead of a green check mark), check for
Computer wiring/power faults and GDC connector security.
4. Replace the GDC 74H.
5. Inspect GDC 74H pitot/static ports and plumbing
for blockage.
6. Replace the GDC 74H configuration module.
7. For TAS failure only, replace the GTP 59 OAT Probe.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-7

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Invalid Display Field Associated Corrective Actions
LRU
OAT 1. Check OAT probe wiring and connectors for faults
or damage.
2. Check GDC config module wiring for damage,
TAS
replace if any is found.
GTP 59 OAT
Probe 3. Replace GDC config module.
4. Replace GDC 74H with a known good unit. If
problem persists, replace the GTP 59.

Page 3-8 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Invalid Display Field Associated Corrective Actions
LRU
1. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell
phone technology is not turned on (even in a
monitoring state) in the cabin.
2. Check PFD Alert Window for PFD, MFD or GRS
configuration, software or failed data path error
messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
3. For an attitude failure while parked, check the
following:
• Is the helicopter stationary if GPS is not
available? Aircraft movement (rocking the
wings or moving the tail) may cause the
attitude and heading to fail if it believes the
aircraft is in motion without GPS input.
4. Check if the GPS has acquired at least four
satellites, has a 3D navigation solution, and a DOP
ATTITUDE FAIL of less than 5.0.
5. Check for metal objects (tool boxes, power carts,
nearby large steel structures, etc.) around the
GRS 77H aircraft that could be interfering with the
AHRS magnetometer.
6. Cycle GRS 77H power to restart initialization.
7. Check the GRS 77H connecter for security and that
proper wire harness strain relief is provided.
8. Check the GRS 77H is fastened down tightly in its
mounting rack and that the mounting rack is not
loose (CAUTION - do not loosen the mounting rack
hardware to the airframe shelf or the aircraft will
need to be re-leveled and the PITCH/ROLL OFFSET
procedure performed).
9. Perform an Engine Run-Up Test to check if engine
vibration is causing the GRS 77H to go offline.
10. Replace the GRS 77H.
11. If problem persists replace the GRS 77H
configuration module.
12. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support if
condition continues after replacing the GRS 77H
and config module for additional assistance.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-9

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Invalid Display Field Associated Corrective Actions
LRU
1. Check PFD Alert Window for PFD, MFD or GRS
configuration, software or failed data path error
messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Check for metal objects (tool boxes, power carts,
nearby large steel structures, etc.) around the
aircraft that could be interfering with the
magnetometer.
3. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell
phone technology is not turned on (even in a
monitoring state) in the cabin.
4. Cycle power after moving aircraft away from metal
objects to determine if metal objects were the
source of the interference. Allow up to five minutes
for the heading to reinitialize.
5. Is the aircraft stationary if GPS is not available?
Aircraft movement (rocking the wings or moving
HDG FAIL GRS 77H
the tail) may cause the attitude and heading to fail
AHRS and
if it believes the aircraft is in motion without GPS
GMU 44
input.
6. Perform a Magnetometer Interference Test to
check for interference from onboard electrical
system components (e.g. NAV lights). Pay
particular attention to any new electrical devices
that have been installed since the aircraft was new.
Correct any discrepancies that do not allow this
test to pass before continuing.
7. Ensure GRS 77H and GMU 44 connectors are
secure.
8. Check the wiring and any inline connectors
between the GRS and GMU for faults.
9. Recalibrate the GMU 44.
10. Replace the GMU 44.
11. If problem persists, replace the GRS 77H.

Page 3-10 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Invalid Display Field Associated Corrective Actions
LRU
Engine/Airframe Sensors
1. Check PFD Alert Window for GIA1/2 or GEA
configuration, software or failed data path error
messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. On the PFD in Configuration Mode, turn to the GEA
STATUS page and verify that the GEA internal
power supply, configuration, and calibration status
boxes are green checked.
3. If the internal power supply box is marked with a
red x, check for shorted engine/airframe sensors
that receive 5V, 10V or 12V power from the GEA
(tach sensor, MAP sensor, Fuel Flow sensor, Fuel
Qty Signal Conditioners, Vacuum Sensor, and oil
GEA 71 pressure sensor).
Engine
Airframe 4. The configuration and calibration boxes should be
Unit and marked with a green check. If the calibration
GIA 63H status boxes are marked with a red x, replace the
Integrated GEA 71.
Avionics 5. Verify the internal, external, and reference voltages
Unit listed in the Main Analog and I/O A Analog boxes
are not dashed out (does not include Aircraft Power
1 and 2). If any voltages are dashed out, replace the
GEA 71.
6. Check the MFD AUX – SYSTEM STATUS page if the
GEA is online (green checkmark on the AUX –
SYSTEM STATUS page is present). If GEA is not
online (Red-X is present), verify the unit is receiving
power at the GEA rack connector.
7. Replace the GEA 71.
8. If problem persists, check the GIA/GEA interconnect
wiring and unit connector pins for faults.

This indication is displayed if the AHRS/MAG system has

GRS 77H
been replaced and has not been calibrated. It also is
Config
displayed if there are problems with the GRS77 Config
Module
Module and/or associated wiring.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-11

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.4 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
This section describes various G1000H message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or LRU
function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ displayed on the MFD
or PFD.
3.4.1 GDU 1040H
Database and Software

Message Cause Solutions

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 The MFD has 1. Reload aviation database into the
aviation database error encountered an error in display.
exists. the Jeppesen database.
2. Contact Garmin Technical Support for
PFD DB ERR – PFD aviation PFD has encountered an
assistance.
database error exists. error in the Jeppesen
database.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 The MFD has 1. Make sure the supplemental data card is
basemap database error encountered an error in inserted fully in the bottom slot of the
exists. the basemap database. display.
PFD DB ERR – PFD basemap PFD has encountered an
2. Remove the supplemental data card
database error exists. error in the basemap
from the bottom slot of the display and
database.
insert in the top slot.
3. If the problem is resolved, the bottom
card slot is dirty or has failed. Try
reinserting the card multiple times in
the bottom slot to clean the card
contacts. If the problem remains in the
bottom slot, you may leave the card in
the top slot (if the top slot if unused) or
replace the display.
4. Swap with a supplemental data card
from another display in the same
system.
5. If problem moves to the other display;
you may either copy the file “bmap.bin”
from the good card to the bad one,
download a replacement file from
Garmin’s website in the Dealer’s Only
section, or replace all the supplemental
datacards as a set. If the basemap data
files are corrupt on both cards,
download a replacement file from
Garmin’s website in the Dealer’s Only
section.
6. If problem remains in the same GDU,
replace that GDU.
Page 3-12 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 Database and Software (continued)

Message Cause Solutions

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain The MFD has 1. Make sure the supplemental data card
database error exists. encountered an error in is inserted fully in the bottom slot of
the terrain database. the display.
PFD DB ERR – PFD terrain PFD has encountered an
2. Remove the supplemental data card
database error exists. error in the terrain
from the bottom slot of the display and
database.
insert in the top slot.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 The MFD has
3. If the problem is resolved, the bottom
obstacle database error encountered an error in
card slot is dirty or has failed. Try
exists. the obstacle database.
reinserting the card multiple times in
PFD DB ERR – PFD obstacle PFD has encountered an the bottom slot to clean the card
database error exists. error in the obstacle contacts. If the problem remains in the
database. bottom slot, you may leave the card in
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport The MFD has the top slot (if the top slot if unused) or
terrain database error exists. encountered an error in replace the display.
the airport terrain 4. Swap with a supplemental data card
database. from another display in the same
PFD DB ERR – PFD airport PFD has encountered an system.
terrain database error exists. error in the airport terrain
5. If problem moves to the other display,
database.
reload the database or replace all the
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe The MFD has supplemental datacards as a set.
Taxi® database error exists. encountered an error in
the SafeTaxi® database. 6. If problem remains in the same GDU,
replace that GDU.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-13

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Database and Software (continued)
Message Cause Solutions
PFD DB ERR – PFD Safe Taxi® PFD has encountered an 1. Make sure the supplemental data card is
database error exists. error in the SafeTaxi® inserted fully in the bottom slot of the
database. display.
2. Remove the supplemental data card from
the bottom slot of the display and insert in
the top slot. If the problem is resolved, the
bottom card slot is dirty or has failed. Try
reinserting the card multiple times in the
bottom slot to clean the card contacts.
3. If the problem remains in the bottom slot,
you may leave the card in the top slot (if
the top slot if unused) or replace the
display.
4. Swap with a supplemental data card from
another display in the same system.
5. If problem moves to the other display,
reload the database or replace all the
supplemental datacards as a set.
6. If problem remains in the same GDU,
replace that GDU.

Page 3-14 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Database and Software (continued)
Message Cause Solutions
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 The MFD has 1. Make sure the supplemental data card is
ChartView database error. encountered an error in inserted fully in the top slot of the display.
the ChartView database. 2. Remove the supplemental data card from
the top slot of the display and insert in the
bottom slot.
3. If the problem is resolved, the top card slot
is dirty or has failed. Try reinserting the
card multiple times in the top slot to clean
the card contacts. If the problem remains
in the top slot, replace the display.
4. Reload the Jeppesen ChartView database
onto the card.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 The MFD has 1. Make sure the supplemental data card is
Terminal Procs database encountered an error in inserted fully in the bottom slot of the
error exists. the Terminal Procedures display.
database. 2. Remove the supplemental data card from
the bottom slot of the display and insert in
the top slot.
3. If the problem is resolved, the bottom card
slot is dirty or has failed. Try reinserting
the card multiple times in the bottom slot
to clean the card contacts. If the problem
remains in the bottom slot, you may leave
the card in the top slot (if the top slot if
unused) or replace the display.
4. Swap with a supplemental data card from
another display in the same system. If
problem moves to the other display, reload
the database or replace all the
supplemental datacards as a set.
5. If problem remains in the same GDU,
replace that GDU.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-15

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Database and Software (continued)
DB MISMATCH – Aviation The system has found the
database version mismatch. Jeppesen aviation Load the same cycle of aviation
Xtalk is off. database in the PFD and database to all displays.
MFD do not match.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation The system has found the
database type mismatch. Jeppesen aviation Load same type aviation database
database types do not to all displays.
match.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain The PFD and/or MFD have
database version mismatch. different terrain database
versions installed.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle The PFD and/or MFD have
database version mismatch. different obstacle
Insert two identical version
database versions
supplemental database cards in
installed.
the PFD and MFD.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain The PFD and/or MFD have
database type mismatch. different terrain database
types installed.
DB MISMATCH – Airport The PFD and/or MFD have
Terrain database mismatch. different airport terrain
Xtalk is off. database types installed.
CAS INOP The system has found the
PFD and/or MFD software Reload PFD and MFD software.
versions do not match.
The Aviation databases Reload Aviation database in all
do not match in both displays.
displays.
SW MISMATCH – GDU The system has found the
software version mismatch. PFDs and/or MFD Load correct software version into
Xtalk is off. software versions do not both displays.
match.
MANIFEST – PFD software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Halted. version loaded in PFD. Load correct software version into
MANIFEST – MFD software The system has detected the display.
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Halted. version loaded in MFD.
CNFG MODULE – PFD The PFD master Check master configuration
configuration module is configuration module has module connector and wiring for
inoperative. failed. damage inside the GDU connector
backshell.

Page 3-16 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Cooling Message Advisories

NOTE
The following alerts only apply if the cooling fan inputs are configured on.

Message Cause Solutions

MFD1 COOLING – has poor The MFD has exceeded its 1. Check cooling fan and wiring for
cooling. Reducing power operating temperature proper operation. Replace cooling
usage. range. fan if unable to determine if
operating correctly.
2. If problem persists, replace the
MFD.
PFD COOLING – has poor PFD has exceeded its 1. Check cooling fan and wiring for
cooling. Reducing power operating temperature proper operation. Replace cooling
usage. range. fan if unable to determine if
operating correctly.
2. If problem persists, replace the
PFD.

Key Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

MFD1 “key” KEYSTK – key is The system has 1. Go to the GDU TEST page in
stuck. determined a key is stuck configuration mode and see if the
on the MFD. key is stuck (if the key is stuck the
PFD “key” KEYSTK – key is The system has corresponding indicator will be
stuck. determined a key is stuck green).
on PFD. 2. Exercise suspected stuck key and
reset GDU TEST page to see if
indicator remains green without
pressing the key.
3. If problem persists, replace the
display.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-17

190-01737-00 Revision A
Miscellaneous GDU Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

XTALK ERROR – A flight A communication error 1. Check the PFD ALERTS Window for
display cross talk error has has occurred between database error Messages. Correct
occurred. the MFD and PFD. all errors before proceeding.
2. Check display Ethernet
interconnect wiring and pins for
faults.
3. Replace PFD with a known good
unit, to verify location of problem.
If problem persists, reinstall
original PFD.
4. Replace MFD.
SIMULATOR – Sim mode is The system is in 1. Check wiring (pin 54 in all GDU
active. Do not use for simulator mode. connectors should be empty).
navigation. 2. Replace PFD with a known good
unit, to verify location of problem.
If problem persists, reinstall
original PFD.
3. If problem persists replace MFD.

Page 3-18 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Miscellaneous GDU Message Advisories (continued)

Message Cause Solutions

DATA LOST – Pilot stored Pilot stored data has 1. If the CLR key was held during a
data lost. Recheck settings. been lost. power cycle, disregard message.
2. Cycle power to PFD. Make sure the
CLR key is not stuck on the GDU
TEST page.
3. If problem persists, replace PFD.
MFD1 SERVICE – needs The system has 1. Make sure the MFD connector is
service. Return unit for determined the MFD fully seated and locked.
repair. needs service. 2. If the unit was started in a very
dark environment, the photocells
may not have enough light to
initially raise the CCFT level. Go to
the GDU STATUS page in
configuration mode, make sure the
CCFT CRNT 1 & 2 levels are above
50 (see figure in Cause column) . If
the CCFT levels are not above 50,
apply light to the photocell and
observe if the CCFT level rises. If
the CCFT level rises, disregard the
message. If the CCFT level does not
rise, replace the MFD.
3. In configuration mode, check the
SDRAM and BKUP CAPS status on
the GDU TEST page (figure below).
If a red x indication exists for either
of these, the MFD needs to be
repaired or replaced.
4. Replace the MFD if problems
persist.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-19

190-01737-00 Revision A
Miscellaneous GDU Message Advisories (continued)

PFD SERVICE – needs service. The system has 1. Make sure the PFD connector is
Return unit for repair. determined PFD needs fully seated and locked.
service. 2. If the unit was started in a very
dark environment, the photocells
may not have enough light to
initially raise the CCFT level. Go to
the GDU STATUS page in
configuration mode, make sure the
CCFT CRNT 1 & 2 levels are above
50.
3. If the CCFT levels are not above 50,
apply light to the photocell and
observe if the CCFT level rises. If
the CCFT level rises, disregard the
message. If the CCFT level does not
rise, replace the PFD.
4. Inspect the master configuration
module connections in the PFD
connector.
5. In configuration mode, check the
SDRAM and BKUP CAPS status on
the GDU TEST page. If a red
indication exists for either of these,
the PFD needs to be repaired or
replaced.
6. Replace the PFD.

Page 3-20 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Miscellaneous GDU Message Advisories (continued)

Message Cause Solutions

PFD CONFIG – PFD The system has detected 1. Reload PFD configuration files from
configuration error. Config a PFD configuration SD Loader Card.
service req’d. mismatch. 2. Reload system configuration files
by pressing the UPDT CFG softkey
on the Configuration Upload Page
in the System Page Group to load
configuration files into the
configuration module.
3. If message persists, check config
module wiring for faults and
replace if necessary.
4. If problem persists, replace the
PFD.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-21

190-01737-00 Revision A
Miscellaneous GDU Message Advisories (continued)

Message Cause Solutions

MFD CONFIG – MFD The system has detected 1. Reload MFD configuration files
configuration error. Config a MFD configuration from SD Loader Card.
service req’d. mismatch. 2. Reload system configuration files
by pressing the UPDT CFG softkey
on the Configuration Upload Page
in the System Page Group to load
configuration files into the
configuration module.
3. If message persists, check config
module wiring for faults and
replace if necessary.
4. If problem persists, replace the
MFD.
PFD VOLTAGE – PFD has low PFD is not receiving 1. Check input voltage to PFD.
voltage. Reduce power sufficient voltage. 2. If input voltage is ok, replace PFD.
usage.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has The MFD is not receiving 1. Check input voltage to the MFD.
low voltage. Reduce power sufficient voltage. 2. If input voltage is ok, replace the
usage. MFD.

Page 3-22 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Miscellaneous GDU Message Advisories (continued)

Message Cause Solutions

HTAWS FAIL HTAWS system failure has 1. Make sure each GDU contains a
occurred. supplemental data card with a
terrain and obstacle database
present.
2. Make sure the GIA’s are online.
3. Make sure the GPS receivers have a
position lock. HTAWS must have a
GPS position and altitude present
to operate.
4. Make sure an Airport Terrain,
Obstacle, Terrain, Aviation
Database, or GDU SW mismatch
has not occurred.
5. If a mismatch has occurred, load
correct database/software files or
replace all the supplemental
database cards as a set.
HTAWS TEST HTAWS system is Normal annunciation during self test.
currently being tested. Test will take up to two minutes to
complete.
HTAWS INHB HTAWS system alerting is Enable HTAWS system alerting by
disabled pressing the MENU button from the
MAP – HTAWS page.
HTAWS N/A GPS system integrity not Make sure a valid GPS position is
high enough to enable received from the AUX – GPS STATUS
HTAWS page.
TRAFFIC FAIL Communication with the Check GIA2/Traffic Device wiring and
traffic device has failed. connectors for faults.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-23

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.4.2 GMA 350H Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

MANIFEST – GMA1 software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Load correct software version.
Halted. version loaded in the
unit.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs The system has
service. Return unit for determined the unit Replace the unit.
repair. needs service.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA 1 is The system has detected 1. Make sure the unit is receiving
inoperative. a failure in the unit. power.
2. Make sure both GIAs are receiving
power.
3. Make sure both GDUs are receiving
power.
4. Make sure the unit/GIA RS-232 data
lines are working properly.
5. Make sure the GIA/GDU Ethernet
data lines are working properly.
6. Replace the unit.

GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 The system has detected 1. Load unit configuration files (see
configuration error. Config a unit configuration Section 5).
service req’d. mismatch. 2. Replace the unit.
3. If problem persists, check config
module wiring for faults and
replace if necessary.

Page 3-24 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.4.3 GSR 56H Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has failed. A failure has been Replace the GSR 56H.
detected in the GSR 56H.
The transceiver is
unavailable.
REGISTER GFDS The GSR 56H is not registered with
Data services are
Garmin Flight Data Services, or its
inoperative, register
current registration data has failed
w/GFDS.
authentication. Register the GSR 56H.

3.4.4 GDL 59H Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

GDL59 CONFIG – GDL 59H GDL 59H configuration Reload GDL 59H configuration files. If
config error. Config service settings do not match problem persists, check config module
req’d. those of backup harness for faults and replace if
configuration memory. necessary.
The system should be
serviced.
GDL59 FAIL – GDL 59H has A failure has been Reload GDL 59H software and
failed. detected in the GDL 59H. configuration files. If problem persists,
The receiver is replace the GDL 59H.
unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
GDL59 SERVICE – GDL 59H A failure has been Reload GDL 59H software and
needs service. Return unit for detected in the GDL 59H. configuration files. If problem persists,
repair. The system should be replace the GDL 59H.
serviced.
GDL59 RTR FAIL – The GDL A failure has been Reload GDL 59H software and
59H router has failed. detected in the GDL 59H configuration files. If problem persists,
router. The system replace the GDL 59H.
should be serviced.
REGISTER GFDS – Data The GDL 59H is not The GDL 59H is not registered with
services are inoperative, registered with Garmin Garmin Flight Data Services, or its
register w/GFDS. Flight Data Services, or its current registration data has failed
current registration data authentication. Register the GDL 59H.
has failed authentication.
MANIFEST – GDL software The GDL 59H has Reload GDL 59H software files.
mismatch, communication incorrect software
halted. installed. The system
should be serviced.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-25

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.4.4.1 Activation Of Garmin Flight Data Services
In order to activate the GDL 59H for Garmin Flight Data Services, contact Garmin Product Support at one of
the following numbers (M-F, 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Standard Time, - Central USA):
• 1.866.739.5687 (toll free in USA)
• +1.913.440.1135 (worldwide)
Please have the following information ready prior to calling:
• If activating services for a GDL59-only installation
◦ Aircraft tail number, serial number, manufacturer, and model
◦ GDL 59H serial number
◦ System ID number
• If activating services for a GDL59 and GSR 56H installation
◦ Aircraft tail number, serial number, manufacturer, and model
◦ Serial number(s) of all GSR 56H units installed in aircraft
◦ G1000 system ID number
◦ Name of aircraft owner and contact information
◦ Credit card information

Page 3-26 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.4.5 COM Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs The system has
service. Return unit for determined COM1 needs Replace GIA1.
repair. service.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs The system has
service. Return unit for determined COM2 needs Replace GIA2.
repair. service.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to- The COM1 external push-
1. Press the push-to-talk switch(s)
talk key is stuck. to-talk (PTT) switch is
again to cycle its operation.
stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. 2. Check push-to-talk switch(s) and
wiring.
3. Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify
location of problem. If problem
follows the unit, replace GIA1.
4. Check GIA1/GMA 350H
interconnect.
5. Replace GMA 350H.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to- The COM2 external push-
1. Press the push-to-talk switch(s)
talk key is stuck. to-talk (PTT) switch is
again to cycle its operation.
stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. 2. Check push-to-talk switch(s) and
wiring.
3. Switch GIA2 and GIA1, to verify
location of problem. If problem
follows the unit, replace GIA2.
4. Check GIA1/GMA 350H
interconnect.
5. Replace GMA 350H.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over The system has detected
1. Check fan, wiring and air tubing for
temp. Reducing transmitter an over temperature in
proper operation (if applicable).
power. COM1.
2. Replace cooling fan if unable to
determine if operating correctly.
3. Replace GIA1.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over The system has detected
1. Check fan, wiring and air tubing for
temp. Reducing transmitter an over temperature in
proper operation (if applicable).
power. COM2.
2. Replace cooling fan if unable to
determine if operating correctly.
3. Replace GIA2.

NOTE
COM 1 and COM 2 remain operable in an over-temperature condition with reduced transmit power.
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-27
190-01737-00 Revision A
3.4.6 NAV Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in NAV1 receiver. Replace GIA1.
repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in NAV2 receiver. Replace GIA2.
repair.

3.4.7 Glideslope Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in G/S1 receiver. Replace GIA1.
repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in G/S1 receiver. Replace GIA2.
repair.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is The system has detected
Switch GIA1 and GIA2 to verify location
inoperative. a failure in G/S1 receiver.
of problem. If problem follows the unit,
replace GIA. If problem does not follow
unit, check G/S1 antenna and cabling.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is The system has detected
Switch GIA1 and GIA2 to verify location
inoperative. a failure in G/S2 receiver.
of problem. If problem follows the unit,
replace GIA. If problem does not follow
unit, check G/S2 antenna and cabling.

Page 3-28 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.4.8 GPS Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs The System has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in GPS1 receiver. Replace GIA1.
repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in GPS2 receiver. Replace GIA2.
repair.
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is The system has detected
Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location
inoperative. a failure in GPS1 receiver.
of problem. If problem follows the unit,
replace GIA1. If problem does not
follow the unit, check GPS1 antenna
and cabling.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is The system has detected
Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location
inoperative. a failure in GPS2 receiver.
of problem. If problem follows the unit,
replace GIA2. If problem does not
follow the unit, check GPS2 antenna
and cabling.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS The system has lost GPS
1. Make sure that the area the aircraft
navigation. GPS fail. navigation information.
was traveling through did not have
loss of GPS coverage. FAA NOTAMs
may be issued for periods of
outages, or the US Coast Guard
website will have notices posted.
2. Using the MFD AUX – GPS Status
page, make sure the signal
strength bars are not erratic. If so,
this indicates outside interference
is affecting the GPS receivers. Find
and remove the source of
interference (i.e. cell phones, FBO
datalink antennas, etc.).
3. Check GPS antenna and cabling.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-29

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.4.9 GIA Configuration Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 The system has detected
configuration error. Config a GIA configuration 1. Reconfigure GIA1.
service req’d. mismatch.
2. If problem persists, check config
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2
module harness for faults and
configuration error. Config
replace if necessary.
service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio The system has detected
config error. Config service a GIA audio configuration 1. Reconfigure GIA #2.
req’d. mismatch.
2. If problem persists, check config
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio
module harness for faults and
config error. Config service
replace if necessary.
req’d.
HW MISMATCH – GIA
hardware mismatch. GIA1
communication halted. The system has detected Replace GIA with a WAAS unit.
HW MISMATCH – GIA a non-WAAS GIA 63.
hardware mismatch. GIA2
communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Halted. version loaded in GIA 1.
Load correct software version.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Halted. version loaded in GIA 2.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in GIA1. Replace GIA1.
repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA1 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in GIA2. Replace GIA2.
repair.

Page 3-30 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.4.10 GRS 77H Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not The GRS 77H is not
1. Check GRS/GDC 74H interconnect.
receiving airspeed. receiving airspeed
information from the GDC 2. Replace the GDC 74H.
74H. 3. If problem does not clear, replace
the GRS 77H.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using GRS 77H is using a
1. Make sure a cell phone or a device
backup GPS source. backup GPS source.
using cell phone technology is not
turned on (even in a monitoring
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not GRS 77H is not receiving state) in the cabin.
receiving backup GPS backup GPS information
information. from either GIA 63H. 2. Check GPS status for GIA 1 and 2 on
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS operating The GRS 77H is operating MFD - AUX GPS STATUS page. If
exclusively in no-GPS mode. in the absence of GPS. one or both GPS receivers cannot
acquire a position lock.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not GRS 77H is not receiving Troubleshoot GPS problems using.
receiving any GPS GPS data from either GIA 3. Replace the GRS 77H.
information. 63H.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 AHRS magnetic field Refer to Section 6 for update
magnetic field model needs model has expired. instructions.
update.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-31

190-01737-00 Revision A
GRS 77H Message Advisories (continued)

Message Cause Solutions

MANIFEST – AHRS1 software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Halted. version loaded in GRS
Load correct software version in the
77H.
GRS 77H.
MANIFEST – AHRS2 software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Halted. version loaded in GRS
77H.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS The system has detected
magnetic model database a magnetic model Refer to Section 6 for update
version mismatch. database version instructions.
mismatch.

3.4.11 GMU 44 Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

MANIFEST – GMU1 software The system has detected
mismatch. an incorrect software
Communication Halted. version loaded in GMU 44. Load correct software version in the
MANIFEST – GMU2 software The system has detected GMU44.
mismatch. an incorrect software
Communication Halted. version loaded in GMU 44.
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 A fault has occurred in GMU
1. Check GMU 44/GRS 77H
magnetometer fault has 44.
interconnect for faults.
occurred.
2. Replace GMU 44.
3. If problem persists, replace
GRS 77H.
HDG FAULT – AHRS2 A fault has occurred in GMU
1. Check GMU 44/GRS 77H
magnetometer fault has 44.
interconnect for faults.
occurred.
2. Replace GMU 44.
3. If problem persists, replace
GRS 77H.

Page 3-32 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.4.12 GTX 33H Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 The system has detected
1. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration
configuration error. Config a GTX 33H configuration
reset on the GTX Config page.
service req’d. mismatch.
2. For a GTX 33H, make sure the
aircraft registration is present in
the GTX Configuration page.
3. If error is still present, reload config
files from a loader card. See
Section 5.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Load correct software version
Halted. version loaded in GTX
33H.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs The system has detected
service. Return unit for a failure in GTX 33H. Replace GTX 33H.
repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is GTX 33H is not
1. Check GIA1/2 to GTX 33H data
inoperative. responding.
paths for failures. See data path
troubleshooting section.
2. Replace GTX 33H.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-33

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.4.13 GDL 69AH Message Advisories

Message Cause Solutions

GDL 69 FAIL – GDL 69 has The system has detected
1. If a GDL 69AH is not installed,
failed. a failure in the GDL 69A.
deactivate the option by
performing the following steps:
x Turn the system on in
Configuration Mode.
x On the PFD, go to the System
Configuration Page in the
System Group.
x Turn the Cursor on by pressing
the FMS Knob.
x Scroll down to GDL 69AH. Press
the ENT key to turn the GDL
69AH off (indicated by the
green check box changing to
empty).
x Turn the system off.
2. Replace GDL 69AH.
3. Check GDL 69AH antenna and
cabling.
4. Check the GDL 69AH and MFD
interconnect.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 The system has detected
Reconfigure the GDL 69AH. See section
configuration error. Config a GDL 69A configuration
5.
service req’d. mismatch.
MANIFEST – GDL software The system has detected
mismatch. Communication an incorrect software
Load correct software version.
halted. version loaded in GDL
69A.

Page 3-34 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.4.14 GDC 74H Message Advisories

Message Cause Recommended Actions

MANIFEST – GDC1 software The system has detected an Load correct software version.
mismatch Communication incorrect software version
halted. loaded in the GDC 74H.

3.4.15 GTS 800 Message Advisories

Message Cause Recommended Actions

Calibration data fault Stored factory calibration Replace the unit.
parameters are invalid.
Configuration data fault Stored system Reconfigure the GTS 800. If problem
configuration parameters persists, replace the unit.
are invalid or Mode S
address is invalid (All 0’s or
F’s ). Fault will persist until
configuration is corrected.
FPGA fault Check of the FPGA image If upload of FPGA image was recently
failed. Fault will persist attempted, retry the upload.
until valid FPGA image is Otherwise, replace the unit.
loaded.
ROM fault Internal non-volatile If upload of audio image or IGRF
memory failure, or invalid magnetic field image was recently
data image detected. attempted, retry the upload. Otherwise
replace the unit.

Execution fault CPU execution fault has Cycle power and retry self test. If fault
occurred. persists, replace the unit.

Electrical fault One of the internal

electrical voltages are out Check aircraft power supply. If fault
of range. Fault will persist persists, replace the unit.
until power is cycled.
Whisper Shout fault Transmitted power is out of Check cable loss configuration, antenna
tolerance. installation and all cable connections
and retry self test. If fault persists,
replace the unit.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-35

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Message Cause Recommended Actions
Transmit Power fault One of the internal
transmitter power source Check aircraft power supply. If fault
voltages are out of range. persists, replace unit.
Fault will persist until
power is cycled.
1030 MHz Frequency Source fault Transmit Frequency Cycle power and retry self test. If fault
synthesizer is not locked. persists, replace unit.
1090 MHz Frequency Source fault Receive Frequency Cycle power and retry self test. If fault
synthesizer is not locked. persists, replace unit.
Receiver Calibration fault -------- Check antenna installation and all cable
connections and retry self test. Ensure
that self test occurs in area free of
buildings and large objects that can
reflect signals. If fault persists, replace
unit.
Transmitter Calibration fault -------- Check antenna installation and all cable
connections and retry self test. Ensure
that self test occurs in area free of
buildings and large objects that can
reflect signals. If fault persists, replace
unit.
Barometric Altitude Input fault Own ship barometric Check wiring to source of barometric
altitude calculation is altitude and ensure that source is
invalid or has timed out. operating. Fault will clear as soon as
valid barometric altitude data is
received.
Main Board Temperature fault Main board temperature or Fault will persist until internal
RF receiver temperature is temperature returns to acceptable
greater than 90° Celsius or range.
less than -60° Celsius.
TCAS Equipage Timeout fault TCAS Equipage data is not Check wiring to TCAS Equipage data
being received or has timed source and ensure that source is
out for 800 ms. operating. Fault will clear as soon as
valid TCAS Equipage data is received.

Page 3-36 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.4.16 GEA 71H Message Advisories

Message Cause Recommended Actions

GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 The system has detected a
1. Reconfigure the GEA.
configuration error. Config GEA configuration
service req’d. mismatch. 2. If problem persists, replace master
configuration module, check config
module harness for faults and replace
if necessary.
NOTE
New Terrain/Obstacle cards, Jeppesen
Aviation Database and other optional
features (i.e. HTAWS unlock card) will need
to be replaced if the master configuration
module is changed. The system ID
number will change to a new number
when installing a new master config
module. The old Terrain and other cards
will no longer work as they will remain
locked to the old System ID number.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software The system has detected an Load correct software version.
mismatch. Communication incorrect software version
Halted. loaded in GEA 71H.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-37

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.4.17 GMA 350H Message Advisories

Message Possible Cause Recommended Actions

MANIFEST – GMA1 software The system has detected an
mismatch. Communication incorrect software version Load correct software version
Halted. loaded in GMA 350H.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs The system has determined
Replace GMA 350H.
service. Return unit for repair. GMA 350H needs service.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is The system has detected a
1. Ensure GMA is receiving power.
inoperative. failure in GMA 350H.
2. Ensure both GIAs are receiving power.
3. Ensure all GDUs are receiving power.
4. Ensure the GMA/GIA RS-232 data lines
are working properly.
5. Ensure the GIA/GDU Ethernet data
lines are working properly.
6. Replace GMA.

GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 The system has detected a

1. Load GMA configuration files.
configuration error. Config unit configuration
service req’d. mismatch. 2. Replace GMA.
3. If problem persists, replace master
configuration module, check config
module wiring for faults and replace if
necessary.
NOTE
New Terrain/Obstacle cards, Jeppesen
Aviation Database and other optional
features (i.e. HTAWS unlock card) will need
to be replaced if the master configuration
module is changed. The system ID
number will change to a new number
when installing a new master config
module. The old Terrain and other cards
will no longer work as they will remain
locked to the old System ID number.

Page 3-38 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.5 DATA PATH TROUBLESHOOTING
The GDU Serial Configuration Page and the GIA Serial/RS-485 Configuration Pages (following figures) can be
used to troubleshoot a problem by observing the data path indications between the selected GDU or GIA unit
and the LRU (Section 3.5.1).

GDU SELECT UNIT (MFD, PFD)

LRU

DATA INDICATION
COLUMN

GDU SERIAL CONFIGURATION PAGE

(RS-232 AND ARINC 429)

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-39

190-01737-00 Revision A
 GIA SELECT UNIT
LRU

DATA INDICATION
COLUMN

GIA SERIAL CONFIGURATION PAGE

(RS-232 AND ARINC 429)

Page 3-40 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.5.1 Data Path Troubleshooting Table

Data Indication Status/Recommended Actions

SELECT UNIT/LRU data path is functioning correctly. No action necessary.

SELECT UNIT/LRU data path is not functioning correctly.
1. Check the MFD avionics status page for select unit or LRU system messages.
Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. If applicable, check the select unit/LRU interconnect wiring and connector pins
for faults.
3. Remove the select unit and verify power and ground are present at the
appropriate connector of the LRU.
• If power or ground is not present, troubleshoot aircraft wiring for faults.
• If power and ground are present, check the select unit and LRU connector
for damaged or pushback pins.
• Ensure LRU connecter is secure and proper wire harness strain relief is
provided.
4. Reload the select unit configuration file. If problem remains, replace the select
unit.
5. Swap LRU #1 and LRU #2 (if an LRU #2 is installed) to confirm if the problem is
in the original LRU #1. Replace original LRU #1 if box displays green check after
swapping units. If problem persists, replace the LRU.
6. For GDU Serial Page select units, swap PFD with known good display to confirm
if the problem is in the original PFD. Replace original PFD if box displays green
check after swapping displays. Swap MFD and PFD (if the same P/N) to confirm
if the problem is in the original MFD. Replace original MFD if box displays green
check after swapping displays.
7. For GIA Serial and RS-485 configuration page select units, swap GIA1 and GIA2,
reconfigure both GIA’s to their new locations to confirm if the problem is in the
original GIA1. Replace original GIA1 if box displays green check after swapping
units.

SELECT UNIT/LRU data path functionally is unknown

• Reload the select unit configuration file.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-41

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.6 TROUBLESHOOTING USING CONFIGURATION PAGES
NOTE
The presence or non-presence of configuration page groups and pages described in this
section will vary according to the specific aircraft configuration optional
requirements.
Configuration pages can help identify a fault by observing the values and symbology in the data fields for
various G1000H subsystems and LRUs. This section describes the configuration pages and gives a basic
definition of their various fields. Configuration data is loaded to the LRUs from an aircraft-specific Garmin
software loader card. Settings are typically are predetermined for a specific aircraft. Different security levels
exist for configuration pages. Most pages contain flight critical information and cannot be accessed using
normal methods.
3.6.1 Indications and Definitions

INDICATION DEFINITION
The LRU is online and reports that the item located next to the indicator box is
communicating.
The LRU is online, and reports that the item located next to the indicator box is not
communicating.
The LRU is not reporting a status for the item located next to the indicator box. This
may be because the data is not available, not applicable, or not expected.

The LRU is not reporting status for the item located next to the indicator box. This may
? be due to the fact that the data is not available or is not expected.

“True” condition; i.e., necessary conditions have met in order to activate the item.
T
“False” condition; i.e., necessary conditions have not been met in order to activate the
F item.

“High” condition; i.e., the system expects a high voltage or a high resistance input to
H trigger the item.

“Low” condition; i.e., the system expects a low voltage or a low resistance input to
L trigger the item.

Page 3-42 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.6.2 Placing the G1000H in Configuration Mode
To enter the system into configuration mode:
1. Press and hold the ENT key on the PFD while applying power. Release the ENT key after
‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ is displayed in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2. Repeat step 1 for the MFD. The System Status Page is displayed on the MFD and the PFD.
Once the system is placed in configuration mode, the large and small FMS knobs are used to cycle through the
different configuration pages, to change page groups, and to change pages in a group. The FMS knob is also
used to perform the following:
1. To activate the cursor, press the small FMS knob.
2. To cycle the cursor through different data fields, rotate the large FMS knob.
3. To change the contents of a highlighted data field, rotate the small FMS knob. This action displays
an options menu for the particular field, or in some cases, allows the user to enter data for the
field.
4. To confirm a selection, press the ENT key.
5. To cancel a selection, press the small FMS knob. Pressing the small FMS knob again turns the
cursor off. The CLR key can also be used to cancel a selection or turn the cursor off.
3.6.3 Configuration Page Security
The following levels of security apply to the configuration pages:

Access Data Security Measure

Pilot Access Pilot profiles, etc. None

Line Techs (troubleshooting) Basic configuration and Hold down <ENT> key on the GDU
statuses (non- at power up.
catastrophic)
Line Techs (software/configuration GDL 69AH antenna Hold down <ENT> key on the GDU
changes) configuration, GDL at power- up, AND enter key
69AH present sequence 12,11,10,12 on System
configuration, Fuel, Status Page for pages.
GEA, GRS, and ADC
configuration and
calibration
Garmin Airframe/alert Not Field Accessible
configuration

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-43

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.6.4 Configuration Page Groups and Descriptions

Figure 3-2. Configuration Pages and Page Groups

Figure 3-3. Configuration Page Title

The following sections describe system configuration pages and give definitions for the various fields and
windows.

Page 3-44 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.6.4.1 System Page Group

System Status Page

NOTE: The System Status page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow softkey operations when
the boot disk is not present.
Data
The System Status page displays the following data:
• Indications that show the presence or non-presence of LRUs (green checkmark, red x). The System
Status page displays a list of LRUs that are configured. The following data is displayed for a selected
LRU:
• Part Number
• Version
• Product
• Copyright
• Serial Number
• Model Number
• Functions Present
• Status
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-45
190-01737-00 Revision A
Time Configuration Page

Data
The Date/Time Setup Configuration page displays the following data:
• UTC date
• UTC time
Operations
The Date/Time Setup Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Set the system UTC date by highlighting the date field and using GDU knob entry
• Set the system UTC time by highlighting the time field and using GDU knob entry

Page 3-46 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Main Lighting Configuration Page

Data
The Lighting Configuration page displays the following data when a GDU is selected:
• Current GDU unit selected
• Current display and key backlight source input value
• Current display and key backlight intensity
• Automatic display and key backlight source
• Display and key backlight filter response time
• Display and key backlight filter minimum value
Note: The filter minimum value defines the minimum lighting intensity for the display and key backlight. The
filter minimum overrides the lighting curve settings when the minimum provides a greater intensity than the
lighting curve. Display backlight filter photocell override transition percent value (if non-photocell display
source is selected)
Note: If the display backlight input percentage is less than the photocell override percentage, the GDU uses
the photocell override curve. Otherwise, the GDU uses the lighting bus curve.
• Display backlight filter photocell vertex selected (if non-photocell display source is selected)
• GMA annunciator and key backlight intensity (if a GMA associated with the selected GDU is configured
to be present)

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-47

190-01737-00 Revision A
 • GMA annunciator and key gain (if a GMA associated with the selected GDU is configured to be present)
• GMA annunciator and key offset (if a GMA associated with the selected GDU is configured to be
present)
• Display and key curve vertices
• Display and key photo curve vertices
The Lighting Configuration page displays the following data when a remote controller is selected:
• Current remote controller unit selected
• Current annunciator and backlight source input value
• Current annunciator and backlight intensity
• Set and active automatic annunciator and backlight source
• Set and active annunciator and backlight filter response time
• Set and active annunciator and backlight filter minimum value
Note: The filter minimum value defines the minimum lighting intensity for the annunciator and backlight. The
filter minimum overrides the lighting curve settings when the minimum provides a greater intensity than the
lighting curve.
• Annunciator and backlight vertex selected
• Set and active annunciator filter photocell override transition percent value (if a non-photocell
annunciator source is selected)
Note: If the annunciator input percentage is less than the photocell override percentage, the remote
controller uses the photocell override curve. Otherwise, the remote controller uses the lighting bus curve.
• Annunciator filter photocell vertex selected (if a non-photocell annunciator source is selected)
• Set and active annunciator and backlight curve vertices
• Set and active annunciator and backlight photo curve vertices
Operations
The Main Lighting Configuration page allows the following operations when a GDU is selected for each field on
the page:
• Select GDU or remote controller unit
• Select automatic display and key backlight source (photo, 14V DC, 28V DC, 5V DC, 5V AC)
• Select display and key backlight filter response time (0-9)
• Select display filter minimum value (0.14 - 100)
• Select key backlight filter minimum value (0 - 100)
• Select display and key vertex for control curve editing
• Select display backlight filter photocell override percent (0 - 100)
• Select display backlight filter photocell vertex for curve editing
• Set coordinates of currently selected curve vertex by rocking the joystick up or down

Page 3-48 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
The Main Lighting Configuration page allows the following operations when a remote controller is selected:
• Select GDU or remote controller unit
• Select automatic annunciator and backlight source (photo, 14V DC, 28V DC, 5V DC, 5V AC, SERIAL)
• Select annunciator and backlight filter response time (0-9)
• Select annunciator and backlight filter minimum value (0.2 - 100)
• Select annunciator and backlight vertex for control curve editing
• Select annunciator filter photocell override percent (0 - 100)
• Select annunciator filter photocell vertex for curve editing
• Set coordinates of currently selected curve vertex by rocking the joystick up or down
• Copy the set configuration to the active configuration by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
Note: The set configuration is the configuration stored by the GDU. The active configuration is the
configuration actually being used by the remote controller. The active and set configurations may not be
synchronized if a remote is configured on a GDU and then is later connected to a different GDU.
• Copy the active configuration to the set configuration by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-49

190-01737-00 Revision A
System Audio

Data
The System Audio page displays the following data:
• Audio clip name
• Audio clip volume
• Altitude alerter threshold clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Altitude alerter deviation limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Altitude alerter beyond limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
Operations
The Audio Clip Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Change audio clip volume with the volume field highlighted
• Change audio alert voice type (male or female) with the voice field highlighted
• Test playback of any available audio clips via selection from the audio clip drop-down list and
highlighting the "PLAY?" or "TEST?" field and pressing ENT
• Stop playback of any available audio clips via highlighting the "STOP?" field and pressing ENT
• Change altitude alerter threshold clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Change altitude alerter deviation limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Change altitude alerter beyond limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)

Page 3-50 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
System Upload Page

Data
The System Upload Configuration page displays the following data:
• Group List
• Item List
• Product List
The System Upload page compares the software part numbers on the loader card and in the LRU and
performs the following operations:
• Inhibit both software and configuration upload by denoting "N/A" on both fields if the part numbers
are mismatched.
• Allow software and configuration (if available) upload with checkbox(es) if the part numbers are
matching.
• Display the product in the product list and allow software and configuration (if available) upload with
checkbox(es) if the reported serial number is less than or equal to the specified maximum and greater
than or equal to the specified minimum.
• Display the product in the product list but mark the software and configuration fields with the text
"INV", displayed in yellow, if the serial number is not being reported by the LRU.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-51

190-01737-00 Revision A
Configuration Items
The System Upload page supports the configuration of the following products (example):
• Airframe
• System
• MFD 1
• PFD 1
• PFD 2
• GIA 1
• GIA 2
• Pilot GMA
• Co-pilot GMA
• GTX 1
• GTX 2
• GEA 1
• GEA 2
• GEA 3
• Pilot GDC
• Copilot GDC
• GDL69
• GCU
• GMC
• Audio
• GSD 1
• GSD 2
• GDL59
• GTS
• COM 1
• COM 2
• Digital GMA 1
• Digital GMA 2
Commands
The System Upload page supports the following commands:
• Clear Configuration

Page 3-52 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
The Clear Configuration command supports the following options:
• Clear all configuration data
• Clear airframe configuration data
• Clear configuration data for airframe alerts and triggers
• Clear configuration data for CMC alerts and triggers
Summary
• A list of attempted uploads and their result in the Summary window
• A visual result next to an item's checkbox (could be both software and configuration) with a result of
PASS (in green text) or FAIL (in red text)
• If serial number checking is enabled for a product and a serial number is not being reported by the
LRU, an attempt to load the product fails immediately and display the text "NO SERIAL REPORTED" in
the Summary window
Status
• The upload status is displayed using the progress pop-up window
Configuration ID
• The configuration ID is displayed in the upper left corner
• The configuration ID is updated after a load configuration or a clear configuration operation is
completed.
Operations
The System Upload Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Selecting an airframe and configuration/software to load
• Checking or unchecking a checkbox which determines if the page will attempt to load that particular
• product's software/configuration by highlighting the software/configuration checkbox for a product
and pressing ENT
• Starting an upload by pressing the LOAD softkey
• Canceling an upload by pressing the CANCEL softkey
• Using the SMRY UP and SMRY DN softkeys to scroll through the summary window
• Updating the configuration backup module with the internal configuration values using the UPDT CFG
Softkey
• When an enablement card is inserted, CLR CFG softkey is displayed on tier #1
• Accessing tier #2 softkeys when CLR CFG softkey is pressed
• Clear all configuration data when CLR ALL softkey is pressed
• Clear airframe configuration data when CLR AFRM softkey is pressed
• Clear configuration data for airframe alerts and triggers when CLR CAS softkey is pressed
• Clear configuration data for CMC alerts and triggers when CLR CMC softkey is pressed

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-53

190-01737-00 Revision A
Aircraft Configuration Page

LRU Configuration Status

A green checkbox indicates that the unit is properly configured and is communicating normally. A yellow
question mark symbol indicates that the unit configuration is invalid. A red x indicates or that the unit is not
communicating properly.
Aircraft Configuration
• Aircraft Registration: Enter the aircraft’s tail number here.
• ICAO Address: Enter the aircraft’s 24 bit ICAO address here.
• IATA Airline Designator: If applicable, enter the airline’s 2 digit airline designator code.
• Country Code: Not used at this time.
• VFR Code: A pre-programmed code which will become active when the VFR key on the GDU is pressed.
Pressing the VFR key again restores the previous code.
Operations
The three softkeys at the bottom of the page allows parameters to be set to GTX 1 and the GTS.

Page 3-54 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
File Manager Page

NOTE: The File Manager page is protected by a boot disk. The page is hidden when the boot disk is not
present.
Data
The File Manager Configuration page displays the following data:
• The current device
• The current directory that is being viewed
• A list of files and sub-directories in the current directory that shows the mode, name, size, and date
modified
Operations
The File Manager Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Change the current directory that is being viewed by pressing ENT with a directory highlighted
• Copy the highlighted file to another directory via the COPY and PASTE softkeys
• Copy the highlighted directory to another directory via the COPY and PASTE softkeys
• Clear the highlighted file if the file is permitted to be cleared via the CLEAR softkey
• Delete the highlighted file if the file is permitted to be deleted via the DELETE softkey
• Delete the highlighted directory if the directory is empty and permitted to be deleted via the DELETE
softkey
• Clear the highlighted directory of all subdirectories and files if the directory is permitted to be cleared
via the CLEAR softkey

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-55

190-01737-00 Revision A
Diagnostics Terminal Page

The Diagnostics Terminal page is only be available in Diagnostics Mode.

Data
The Diagnostics Terminal page displays the following data:
• Currently selected LRU
• Currently selected command
• Output data received from the selected LRU
Operations
The Diagnostics Terminal page allows the following operations for each field on the page:
• Selecting an LRU to review from the list by highlighting the LRU field or selecting the "Select LRU
Window" menu option
• Changing the command to execute by highlighting the Command field or selecting the "Select
Command Window" menu option
• Executing the selected command by pressing ENT once the command has been entered
• Scrolling through the output from the selected LRU by pressing the OUTPUT softkey or selecting the
"Select Output Window" menu option, then turning the FMS inner knob.
• Freeze the output of the selected LRU by pressing the FREEZE softkey or selecting the "Freeze
Diagnostics Data" menu option.
• Clear the output data received thus far by pressing the CLEAR softkey or selecting the "Clear
Diagnostics Data" menu option.
Page 3-56 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Copy the output data received to the card by pressing the CP2CRD softkey or selecting the "Copy
Diagnostics Data to Card" menu option.
• Log the data to the card by pressing the LG2CRD softkey or by selecting the "Start Log Diagnostics to
Card" menu option.
• Move the highlight to the LRU selection field by pressing the LRU softkey.
• Move the highlight to the command entry field by pressing the COMMAND softkey.
• Move the highlight to the output window by pressing the OUTPUT softkey.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-57

190-01737-00 Revision A
OEM Diagnostics Page

The OEM Diagnostics page is available and displays diagnostics data when all of the conditions in either of the
following cases are met:
• The LRU is in configuration mode
• An HTML diagnostics card is inserted
• The LRU is in normal mode
• The LRU is an MFD
• An HTML diagnostics card is inserted
• The MFD is not in a reversionary state
• The airframe is on ground in maintenance mode
The OEM Diagnostics page is available when the LRU is in configuration mode, regardless of LRU type, but
only display diagnostics data if an HTML diagnostics card is inserted.
Data
The OEM Diagnostics page displays the following data:
• Contents of index.htm file located in "html" directory on card (html\index.htm).

Page 3-58 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Operations
The OEM Diagnostics page allows the following operations:
• Capture screen image to the "print" directory on the card by pressing the SAVE IMG softkey or
selecting the "Save Image" menu option.
• Traversing fields defined by data on the card.
• Selecting items using the ENT key.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-59

190-01737-00 Revision A
System Configuration Page

NOTE: The System Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page allows only GDL present to be
configured without a boot disk present.
Data
• Indicates the presence (green check mark) or non-presence (red x) of LRUs.

Page 3-60 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
System Data Paths Configuration Page

The System Data Paths Configuration page displays the following data when the A429, CAN, RS-232, or RS-485
data path softkey is selected.
A table containing one row for each configured LRU with the following data per row, ordered from left to right:
• A text field indicating the LRU name in the column
• A text field indicating the channel name
A status indicator showing:
• An N/A indication if the monitor is on and data path status is "N/A"
• A positive indication if the monitor is on and data path status is "OK"
• A negative indication if the monitor is on and data path status is "FAIL"
• An unknown indication if the monitor is off or the monitor is "ON" and data path status is
"UNKNOWN"
A text field indicating the port monitor status:
• "ON" if the monitor is turned on
• "OFF" if the monitor is turned off
A text field indicating the port status with the following possible values:
• "OK" if the port is communicating
• "FAIL" if the port is not communicating

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-61

190-01737-00 Revision A
 • "N/A" if the port is not applicable
• "UNKNOWN" if the port status is unknown
Data
The System Data Paths Configuration page displays the following data when the HSDB data path softkey is
selected.
A table containing one row for each configured LRU with the following data per row, ordered from left to right:
• A text field indicating the LRU name in the column
• A drop down selectable field indicating the expected LRU for each HSDB port
• A white text field indicating the current LRU for each HSDB port
A status indicator for each HSDB port:
• An N/A indicator if the expected LRU is configured to none and there is no actual LRU online
• A positive indicator if the expected LRU matches actual LRU online
• A negative indicator if the expected LRU does not match actual LRU online
Operations
The System Data Paths Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Turn on/off port monitor on A429, CAN, RS-232, or RS-485 page
• Configure port on HSDB page
• Display ARINC-429 port monitoring information by pressing the A429 softkey
• Display CAN port monitoring information by pressing the CAN softkey
• Display HSDB path monitoring information by pressing the HSDB softkey
• Display RS-232 port monitoring information by pressing the RS-232 softkey
• Display RS-485 port monitoring information by pressing the RS-485 softkey

Page 3-62 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
System Setup Page
Setup Page 1

In addition to the field definitions that are described in the Pilot’s Guide, the following additional fields exist:
Fuel Type
• Displays the currently configured system fuel type.
• Allows the user to set the currently configured fuel type for the system, which will result in the
configuration for the GDU, GIA 1, GIA 2, GSD 1, and GSD 2 to be set to the selected fuel type, by
highlighting the currently allowed system fuel type setting.
Flight Director
• Displays the currently allowed system flight director setting(s).
• Allows the user to set the currently allowed system flight director setting(s) by highlighting the
currently allowed system flight director setting and turning the small GCU 275 PFD Knob if more than
one flight director option is allowed per the airframe specific requirements document.
GFDS Data Request
The GFDS Data Request section of the System Setup page is only be available when GFDS Weather is
configured. The GFDS Data Request Section displays the following data:
• Fastest Update Rate

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-63

190-01737-00 Revision A
Operations
• The user is able to set the Fastest Update Rate by highlighting the current setting and selecting from
the following list (Default, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, 60 Min).
• Pilot profile data and operations is not available on the configuration mode System Setup page.

Setup Page 2

Operations
• Skid Setup-sets skids for Low or High/Emergency Floats.

Page 3-64 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Weight and Balance Page

Refer to Bell maintenance documentation for weight and balance configuration information.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-65

190-01737-00 Revision A
Manifest Configuration Page

The Manifest Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the
boot disk is not present.
Data
• Software Card
• Part number
• Version number
• LRUs
• Part number
• Version number
Operations
• Changing an LRU part number
• Changing an LRU version number

Page 3-66 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Maintenance Log Page

Data
The Maintenance Log Configuration Page displays a list of log entries with the following information for each
entry:
• Entry alert ID
• Date & Time
• Set or Clear
• Inhibit state
The Maintenance Log Configuration page displays the log data points for the selected log entry.
Operations
The Maintenance Log Configuration Page allows the following operations:
• Clear the maintenance log by pressing the CLEAR softkey and then confirming a popup dialog.
• Save the maintenance log to an SD card by pressing the CP2CRD softkey
• Select log section to view by pressing the SECTION softkey and the subsequent number softkeys

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-67

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.6.4.2 GDU Page Group
GDU Serial Configuration Page

Data
The GDU RS-232/ARINC 429 Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GDU unit selected
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2
• ARINC 429 SDI
• Set and active inputs for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
• Set and active outputs for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
• Port status indication for each ARINC 429 input
• Port status indication for each RS-232 input
Operations
The GDU RS-232/ARINC 429 Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GDU unit
• Select set speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2
• Select set data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2

Page 3-68 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Select ARINC 429 SDI
• Select set input for RS-232 channels 1 through 2
• Select set output for RS-232 channels 1 through 2
GDU Status Page

Data

'STATUS' Window:
• RAM―Indicates condition of GDU 1240A RAM memory. If it does not pass, the unit may not initialize.
• XILINX―Indicates condition of GDU 1240A XILINX processor. If it does not pass, the unit may not
initialize.
• BASE MAP―Indicates condition of stored basemap in the GDU 1240A. A green box indicates the
basemap has been installed. If the box is black, the basemap will need to be loaded. Contact Garmin
for assistance.
• ETHERNET 1, 2, 3―Indicates status of the GDU 1040As Ethernet channel. A green box indicates the
ETHERNET loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is
present.
• RS-232 1, 2―Indicates status of the GDU 1040As RS-232 channel. A green box indicates the RS-232
loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is present.
• IRDA―Indicates status of GDU 1240A IrDA infrared port. Used for Garmin testing, it is not activated at
this time
• ETHERNET 4―Indicates status of GDU 1040As Ethernet channel 5. Used for Garmin testing, it is not
activated at this time

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-69

190-01737-00 Revision A
'ANALOG' Window:
• PHOTOCELL A, B: Displays the input value of display photocells, between 0 and 9999. The values can
be converted to a percentage by adding a decimal place two digits over from the right (example: 8035
= 80.35%). If there is a significant split (~30% to 50%) you can expect the display to appear different
from the other display in the aircraft, IF both of their lighting curves are set to the same values.
Replace the display if one photocell reading is significantly different from the other.
• BEZEL THERM―Displays the temperature of the GDU bezel, expressed in degrees Celsius (Example:
2064 = 20.64 degrees Celsius)
• CCFT CRNT 1, 2―Displays an indication of current flowing through the display backlight bulbs.
Number does not reflect actual current value and is not useful for troubleshooting.
• LGHT BUS AC―Displays the input value of the AC lighting bus, if enabled. Disregard number if it is not
used in the installation.
• LGHT BUS DC―Displays the input value of the DC lighting bus, if enabled. Disregard number if not
used in the installation.
• POWER (1.3V, 2.5V, 3.3V, 28 V 1/2)―Displays power input voltages of various internal components.
Should be within 10% of the desired voltage. (example: for 2.5V field, 2500 = 2.500 Vdc; for 28V Field,
3633 = 36.33 Vdc). Replace the display if these values are more than 10% from the desired voltage.
• INTRNL TEMP 1, 2―Displays the internal temperature sensor values of the display, in degrees Celsius.
(Example: 45267 = 45.267°C)
'DISCRETE' Window:
GDU System ID 1 GDU System ID 2 GDU System ID 3 Display Mode
Black Black Green MFD
Black Black Black PFD #1
Green Black Black PFD #2
• SYS ID 1, 2, 3―Displays the current system ID assigned to the display. Green indicates that the System
ID pin is strapped to ground. Black indicates that the System ID pin is left ‘open’ and not strapped to
ground.
• RVRSNRY MODE 1, 2―Displays the current status of the reversionary modes. Reversionary Mode 1 is
activated by the GMA 350H reversion button. Reversionary Mode 2 is activated by a second GMA
350H, if installed. Reversionary 1 input is a ground on Pin 58, reversionary 2 input is a ground on Pin
15.
• SPARE INPUT―A green box indicates Pin 14 is grounded. This input should have a black box, if it is
green check for connector miswiring or a bent pin.
• TEST/DEMO MODE SLCT―A green box indicates Pin 53/54 is grounded. These inputs should have a
black box, if either box is green check for connector miswiring or a bent pin.
• PULSE PER SEC 1, 2―Displays status of GPS time synchronization inputs (from GIA) to the GDU. Used
for Garmin testing, not useful for troubleshooting.
The ‘Discrete' Window displays the current configuration of discrete inputs into the display. These settings
are loaded with the system Loader Card and must not be changed. The input box is green if it is receiving the
input, black if no input is expected, or red for a missing input. If the active column does not match the set
column, load PFD/MFD configuration files. These settings are loaded with the system Loader Card and must
not be changed.

Page 3-70 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
GDU Key Test Page

The GDU Key Test Page shows a graphical layout of all display buttons in red. Each red button turns green
when the button is pressed indicating correct operation of the button.
GDU Test Page Window Descriptions

'DISPLAY-NEC®' Window:
• DUTY PWM 1―Displays the display brightness duty pulse width modulation. Value range is between 0
and 9999 and corresponds to the display brightness value shown. Not useful for troubleshooting.
• CRNT PWM―Displays percentage of current pulse-width-modulation to backlight bulbs. Value is
between 0 and 10,000, showing the percentage of the maximum allowable current to the backlight.
Not useful for troubleshooting.
• TOGGLE PWM TO MANL?― Allows the technician to manually adjust the display brightness.
• TOGGLE CCFT OFF?― Allows the technician to turn off the backlight current controller.
• 'KEY' Window:
• KEY PWM―Displays the keypad pulse width modulation brightness value. Range is between 0 and
9999 and corresponds to the keypad brightness value shown. Not useful for troubleshooting.
• TOGGLE KEY BKLT OFF?―Allows the technician to toggle the keyboard backlight off.
• REINIT PAGE INFO?―Allows technician to re-initialize all information on the test page.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-71

190-01737-00 Revision A
'ADC' Window:
• PHOTOCELL A, B―Displays the input value of display photocells, between 0 and 9999. The values can
be converted to a percentage by adding a decimal place two digits over from the right (Example: 8035
= 80.35%). If there is a significant split (~30% to 50%) you can expect the display to appear different
from the other display in the aircraft, IF both of their lighting curves are set to the same values.
Replace the display if one photocell reading is significantly different from the other.
• BEZEL THERM―Displays the temperature of the GDU bezel, expressed in degrees Celsius.
• CCFT CRNT 1, 2―Displays an indication of current flowing through the display backlight bulbs.
Number does not reflect actual current value and is not useful for troubleshooting.
• POWER (2.5V, 3.3V, 28 V 1, 2; 1.3V)―Displays power input voltages of various internal components.
(Example: for 2.5V field, 2500 = 2.500 Vdc; for 28V Field, 3633 = 36.33 Vdc) They need to be within 10%
of desired voltages. Replace the display if these values are more than 10% from the desired voltage.
• LGHT BUS DC, AC―Displays input value of AC and DC lighting bus inputs, depending on which is
configured. Disregard number if not used in the installation.
• INTRNL TEMP 1, 2―Displays the internal temperature of the GDU, expressed in degrees Celsius.
'TEST' Window:
• IIC EEPROM―Displays the condition of the GDU configuration module EEPROM chip, located in the
backplate connector. It should be green for the PFD and red for the MFD. If it is red on the PFD, check
configuration module wiring and pins for damage before replacing the configuration module.
• DATACARD CHKSUM 1, 2―Requires the use of a special datacard. Tests the datacard reader interface
function. Used for Garmin testing, not useful for troubleshooting.
• NAND, NOR FLASH, SDRAM―Displays the condition of various GDU internal components.
• A429 LOOP 1, 2―Indicated the status of the GDU 1040As ARINC 429 channels. A green box indicates
the ARINC 429 loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicated it may not be used or a wiring fault
is present.
• ETHERNET 1, 2, 3―Indicates status of the GDU 1040As Ethernet channel. A green box indicates the
ETHERNET loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is
present.
• RS-232 1, 2―Indicates status of the GDU 1040As RS-232 channel. A green box indicates the RS-232
loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is present.
• IRDA―Indicates status of GDU 1240A IrDA infrared port. Used for Garmin testing, it is not activated at
this time.
• BKUP CAPS―Indicates status of the Backup Capacitor Test. A green box indicates the test passed, a
red box indicates it failed.
'DISCRETE' Window:
GDU System ID 1 GDU System ID 2 GDU System ID 3 Display Mode
Black Black Green MFD
Black Black Black PFD #1
Green Black Black PFD #2

Page 3-72 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • RVRSNRY MODE 1, 2―Displays the current status of the reversionary modes. Reversionary Mode 1 is
activated by the GMA 350H reversion button. Reversionary Mode 2 is activated by a second GMA
350H, if installed. Reversionary 1 input is a ground on Pin 58, reversionary 2 input is a ground on Pin
15.
• PULSE PER SEC 1, 2―Displays status of GPS time synchronization inputs (from GIA 63H) to the GDU.
Used for Garmin testing, not useful for troubleshooting.
• TEST, DEMO MODE SELECT―A green box indicates Pin 53/54 is grounded. These inputs should have a
black box, if either box is green check for connector miswiring or a bent pin.
• FPGA―Displays the condition of the GDU FPGA processor. If it does not pass the unit may not
initialize.
• SYS ID 1, 2, 3―Displays the current system ID assigned to the display. Green indicates that the System
ID pin is strapped to ground. Black indicates that the System ID pin is left ‘open’ and not strapped to
ground. (See Table below) PFD #2 is not used in certain aircraft.
• REMOTE OFF―Allows the display to control power of a remote system. Not used in any installation at
this time.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-73

190-01737-00 Revision A
Diagnostics Page

NOTE: The Diagnostics page is protected by a boot disk. The page is hidden when the boot disk is not present.
Data
• A list of up to the 99 most recent exceptions for the processor that describes the type of exception and
the day and time for each exception
• Source module, file, and line number of assert, if assert is selected
• Task if applicable
• Registers R0 through R12
• SP register
• LR register
• CPSR register
• PC register
• FSR register
• FADDR register
• CPU trace
• Stack dump
• Power cycles
• Power hours
• Fault

Page 3-74 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Temperature Maximum, Minimum, and Average
Operations

• Scroll through the list of exceptions

• Scroll through the CPU trace by pressing the CPU TRCE softkey
• Scroll through the stack dump by pressing the STCK DMP softkey
• Delete an exception by highlighting the exception and pressing CLR
• Save the error log to a data card by pressing the SAVE LOG softkey
• Clear the error log by pressing the CLR LOG softkey
• Toggle between viewing the CPU trace and stack dump by pressing the CPU TRCE or STCK DMP
softkeys
• Selecting to scroll through the Exceptions or CPU trace/stack dump windows by pressing the
EXCEPTNS or MEMORY softkeys when an exception has been selected

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-75

190-01737-00 Revision A
Ethernet Test Page

The Ethernet Test page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the boot disk is
not present.
Data
The Serial / Ethernet I/O Configuration page displays the following Ethernet statistics for the selected
Ethernet port:
• Good frames received • Transmit max collision errors
• Receive collision detections • Transmit late collision errors
• Receive alignment errors • Transmit underrun errors
• Receive overrun errors • Transmit lost carrier sense
• Receive resource errors • Transmit frames deferred
• Receive CRC errors • Transmit single collisions
• Receive short frame errors • Transmit multiple collisions
• Number of Flow Control frames received • Number of Flow Control frames
that are not Flow Control Pause Frames transmitted
• Number of Flow Control frames received • Transmit total collisions
• Good frames transmitted

Page 3-76 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
HSDB Statistics
The Serial / Ethernet I/O Configuration page displays the following HSDB statistics:
• Pings transmitted • Number of received acknowledgement
request packets
• Number of transmitted periodic packets
• Number of received acknowledgement
• Number of transmitted acknowledgement
packets
request packets
• Minimum acknowledgement time in
• Number of transmitted acknowledgement
milliseconds
packets
• Maximum acknowledgement time in
• Number of transmitted retry packets
milliseconds
• Number of aborted transmission packets
• Number of packets pending
• Number of write fails
• Number of LRU online changes
• Number of received periodic packets
• Number of overruns
The Serial / Ethernet I/O Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Change the selected Ethernet port
• Show non-volatile statistics log by pressing the NONVOL softkey
• Clear non-volatile statistics log by pressing the CLR LOG softkey

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-77

190-01737-00 Revision A
Video Test Page

The Video Test page is only present when the number of available video decoder sources is greater than zero.
Data
• An image of the selected video source scaled to the available display space.
• Identification of the selected video source in the upper-left corner of the image, as determined by
configuration.
• If the selected video signal is not available, the page displays "NO DATA AVAILABLE".
• Current source configuration information
• Text identifier description for the video source (0-19 characters)
• Source number (1, 2)
• Whether or not the source is configured
• Source standard (NTSC, PAL, AUTO)
• Rotation (0°, 90°, 180°, 270°)
• Original dimensions (width and height)
• Crop (0-49% for each side)
• Size of inset window (a percentage of the main window, 10%-50%)
• Text timeout (0-10s)
• Current source settings
• Brightness (0-100%)
• Contrast (0-100%)
Page 3-78 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Saturation (0-100%)
• Digital zoom level (1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x)
The Video Test Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Switching to the VIDEO 1 source, by pressing the VIDEO 1 softkey.
• Switching to the VIDEO 2 source, by pressing the VIDEO 2 softkey.
• Changing the video format standard to AUTO mode, by pressing the AUTO softkey.
• Changing the video format standard to NTSC mode, by pressing the NTSC softkey.
• Changing the video format standard to PAL mode, by pressing the PAL softkey.
• Rotating the video image, by pressing the ROTATE softkey.
• Increasing the contrast of the video image, by pressing the CNTRST + softkey.
• Decreasing the contrast of the video image, by pressing the CNTRST - softkey.
• Increasing the brightness of the video image, by pressing the BRIGHT + softkey.
• Decreasing the brightness of the video image, by pressing the BRIGHT - softkey.
• Increasing the saturation of the video image, by pressing the SAT + softkey.
• Decreasing the saturation of the video image, by pressing the SAT - softkey.
• Increasing the zoom level of the video image, by pressing the ZOOM IN softkey.
• Decreasing the zoom level of the video image, by pressing the ZOOM OUT softkey.
• Hiding or showing the video image, by pressing the HIDE softkey.
• Modification of saved configuration settings (when an enablement card is inserted)
• Saving modified configuration settings, by pressing the SAVE softkey.
• Discarding modified configuration settings (and restoring the last saved settings), by pressing the
DISCARD softkey.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-79

190-01737-00 Revision A
Alert Configuration Page

The Alert Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the boot
disk is not present.
The Alert Configuration page has two display modes, List and Detail, described in the following requirements.
List View Data
The Alert Configuration page displays the following data in List View:
A list of configurable alerts, including:
• Alert ID
• Alert Brief Text
• Alert State (set or cleared)
A list of configurable triggers, including:
• Trigger ID
• Trigger Description
Detail View Data
• The Alert Configuration page displays the following data in Detail View:
• ID of the selected alert
• Brief Text of the selected alert

Page 3-80 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Descriptive Text of the selected alert
• Level of the selected alert
• Notify flags of the selected alert
• Acknowledge flags of the selected alert
• Flags value of the selected alert
• Maintenance log section(s) to notify on alert set
• Maintenance log section(s) to notify on alert clear
• Clear flags of the selected alert
• Set-audio of the selected alert
• Clear-audio of the selected alert
• Discrete out controlled by the selected alert
• OEM that created/configured the selected alert
• The OEM revision of the selected alert
• A list of the alert's nodes, each node displaying:
o Node number
o Trigger ID
o Parent node
o Operation
o State
• ID of the selected trigger
• Source of the selected trigger
• Data id of the selected trigger, and description (e.g. discrete id and discrete name)
• Data type of the selected trigger
• Data offset of the selected trigger
• Flags of the selected trigger
• Threshold and threshold operation of the selected trigger
• Extinguish and extinguish operation of the selected trigger
• Set time of the selected trigger
• Clear time of the selected trigger
• OEM that created/configured the selected trigger
• The OEM revision of the selected trigger

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-81

190-01737-00 Revision A
List View Operations
In LIST View mode, the Alert Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Switch to Detail View mode by pressing the DETAIL softkey
• Switch to Detail View mode by highlighting an alert or trigger and pressing ENT
• Select the Alerts list by pressing the ALERTS softkey
• Select the Triggers list by pressing the TRIGGERS softkey
Detail View Operations
In DETAIL View mode, the Alert Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Switch to List View mode by pressing the • Modify each node's Parent node
LIST softkey
• Modify each node's Operation
• Select the alert to view
• Modify the selected trigger's Source
• Select the selected trigger to view
• Modify the selected trigger's Data id
• Modify the selected alert's Brief Text
• Modify the selected trigger's Data type
• Modify the selected alert's Descriptive Text
• Modify the selected trigger's Data offset
• Modify the selected alert's Level from a
• Modify the selected trigger's Flags
drop-down list
• Modify the selected trigger's Threshold
• Modify the selected alert's Notify flags
and threshold operation
• Modify the selected alert's Flags value
• Modify the selected trigger's Extinguish
• Modify the selected alert's Acknowledge and extinguish operation
flags
• Modify the selected trigger's Set time
• Modify the selected alert's Clear flags
• Modify the selected trigger's Clear time
• Modify the selected alert's Set-audio
• Modify the selected trigger's OEM Revision
• Modify the selected alert's Clear-audio
• Save the modifications to the alert by
• Modify the selected alert's Discrete Out pressing the SV ALRT softkey
from a drop-down list
• Save the modifications to the trigger by
• Modify the selected alert's OEM Revision pressing the SV TRGR softkey
• Modify each node's Trigger ID
Common Operations
The Alert Configuration page allows the following operations in both List and Detail views:
• Acknowledge all alerts by pressing the ACK softkey
• Switch between viewing CAS and LOG alerts by pressing the CAS and LOG softkeys, respectively

Page 3-82 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
DAT Configuration Page

Refer to Garmin engineering for information regarding the DAT Configuration Page.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-83

190-01737-00 Revision A
Airframe Configuration Page

Page Security
The Airframe Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the
boot disk is not present.
General
• The Airframe Configuration page displays and configure information relating to the specific airframe
per the airframe specific system requirements.
• For each airframe, the Airframe Configuration page displays and configures the navigation center
offset with a resolution of 1 foot or 0.1 meters depending on the units configured in the system.
• For each airframe, the Airframe Configuration page displays all OEM Tag/Value Pairs for which the Tag
is defined.
• For each airframe, the Airframe Configuration page configures all OEM Values for which the Tag is
defined.

Page 3-84 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
HTAWS Setup Page

Terrain Alerting Configuration

The HTAWS Setup Configuration page displays the current HTAWS configuration.
Airport Criteria
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays the following data related to airport criteria:
• Runway surface type
• Minimum length (ft)
Voice Callouts
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays data related to voice callouts for each voice callout.
Audio Configuration
The HTAWS Setup Configuration page can be configured for alerts or system status.
Operations
The HTAWS Setup Configuration page allows the following operations, if the data fields are available:
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page softkeys (if applicable):
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Airport Criteria group by pressing the APT softkey
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Voice Callouts group by pressing the VCO softkey
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Audio Configuration group by pressing the AUDIO softkey
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-85
190-01737-00 Revision A
Airport Criteria
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page airport criteria fields (if
applicable):
• Select a minimum runway surface (Any, Hard only, Hard/Soft, Water)
• Select a minimum runway length
Voice Callouts
The following operations is allowed for the HTAWS Setup Configuration page voice callout fields (if
applicable):
• Select a voice callout to modify
• Enable or Disable the given voice callout
Audio Configuration
The following operations is allowed for the HTAWS Setup Configuration page audio configuration fields (if
applicable):
• Select among the available audio messages for the given alert type or system status message
• Play the selected audio message by pressing ENT

Page 3-86 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.6.4.3 GIA Page Group
GIA Serial Configuration Page

Data
The GIA RS-232 / ARINC 429 Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GIA unit selected
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 3
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 3
• ARINC 429 SDI
• Set and active inputs for RS-232 channels 1 through 8
• Set and active outputs for RS-232 channels 1 through 8
• Port status indication for each ARINC 429 input
• Port status indication for each RS-232 input

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-87

190-01737-00 Revision A
Operations
The GIA RS-232 / ARINC 429 Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select set speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Select set speeds for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 3
• Select set data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Select set data for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 8
• Select ARINC 429 SDI
• Select set input for RS-232 channels 1 through 8
• Select set output for RS-232 channels 1 through 8
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copy the active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
• Clear the non-volatile registry data for the serial configurations by pressing the CLR softkey
GIA RS-485 Configuration Page

Data
The GIA RS-485 Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GIA unit selected
• Set and active inputs for RS-485 channels 1 through 5
• Set and active outputs for RS-485 channels 1 through 5
• Clocked data interface set and active input/output data type
• Port status indication for each RS-485 input

Page 3-88 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Operations
The GIA RS-485 Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select set input for RS-485 channels 1 through 5
• Select set output for RS-485 channels 1 through 5
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copy the active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
• Select set data for clocked data interface input/output
GIA I/O Configuration Page

Data
The GIA I/O Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GIA unit selected
• Current input / output type selected
• List of discrete I/O channel configurations or analog I/O function configurations
Discrete I/O Channel Configurations
The list of discrete I/O channel configurations displays the following data for each item:
• Discrete I/O channel's set data type

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-89

190-01737-00 Revision A
 • Discrete I/O channel's active data type
• Discrete I/O channel's current status
• Discrete I/O channel's set inversion status
• Discrete I/O channel's active inversion status
• Discrete input channel's set active debounce time (if discrete in selected)
• Discrete input channel's active debounce time (if discrete in selected)
• Discrete input channel's set inactive debounce time (if discrete in selected)
• Discrete input channel's active inactive debounce time (if discrete in selected)
Analog I/O Function Configurations
The list of analog I/O function configurations displays the following data for each item:
• Analog I/O function
• Analog I/O function's set and active status
Operations
The GIA I/O Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select a GIA unit
• Select input / output type (discrete in, discrete out, analog in, analog out)
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copy active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
Discrete I/O Channel Configurations
The list of discrete I/O channels allows the following operations for each item:
• Select a discrete I/O channel's set data type
• Select a discrete I/O channel's set inversion status (true or false) (if its data type is defined)
• Modify a discrete input channel's set active debounce time (if its data type is defined)
• Modify a discrete input channel's set inactive debounce time (if its data type is defined)
• Toggle the signal of a discrete output channel (true or false) (if its data type is defined)
Analog I/O Channel Configurations
The list of analog I/O functions allows the following operations for each item:
• Toggle an analog I/O function's enabled status (true or false)

Page 3-90 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
GIA COM Setup Page

Data
The COM Setup Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GIA unit selected
• Calibration communication frequency
• Communication frequency kHz spacing selection
• Communication volume
• Emergency communication volume (set and active data)
• 25 kHz squelch adjustment (set and active data)
• kHz squelch adjustment (set and active data)
• Sidetone adjustment (set and active data)
• Microphone gain adjustment (set and active data)
Operations
The COM Setup Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select calibration communication frequency
• Select communication frequency spacing (8.33 kHz, 25.0 kHz)
• Select communication volume
• Select emergency communication volume
• Select 25.0 kHz squelch adjustment
• Select 8.33 kHz squelch adjustment
• Select sidetone adjustment
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-91
190-01737-00 Revision A
 • Select microphone gain adjustment
• Store current calibration settings by pressing the STORE softkey (Calibration Method)
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey (Configuration
Method)
• Copy the active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey (Configuration
Method)
GIA Status Page

Data
The GIA Status Configuration page displays the following data reported from GIA 1 or GIA 2:
GPS Status
• GIA with Non-WAAS Capable GPS Receiver
• ROM status
• RAM status
• ASIC status
• Receiver status
GIA with WAAS Capable GPS Receiver
• RTC Battery
• Battery
• PLL Locked
Page 3-92 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • EEPROM
Glideslope Status
• ROM status
• EEPROM status
• Synthesizer lock status
COM Status
• ROM status
• EEPROM status
• Receive status
• Transmit status
• Synthesizer lock status
• Low Power status
• Over temperature status
VLOC Status
• ROM status
• EEPROM status
• XILINX status
• Synthesizer lock status
Main GIA Status
• ROM status • -5V power range status
• Analog calibration status • -12V power range status
• EEPROM 1, 2 status • Aircraft power range A and B status
• FPGA 1, 2 status • Over temperature status
• +28V power range status • Low temperature status
• +12V power range status • +5V backed power status
• +5V power range status • 3V battery status
• +3.3V power range status • BKUP CAPS Backup capacitor status
Analog Status
• Aircraft power A and B
• Temperature

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-93

190-01737-00 Revision A
Discrete Status
• System ID Program 1 and 2
Fuel
• System Fuel Type
Operations
The GIA Status Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select which GIA to display data for

Page 3-94 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
GIA CAN Configuration Page

Data
The GIA CAN Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GIA unit selected
• Current CAN channel selected
• Set and active input data type for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Set and active output data type for CAN outputs on channels 1 and 2
• Set and active speeds for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Set and active on/off status for five left, two center, and five right fuel packets for CAN channels 1 and
2
Operations
The GIA CAN Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select CAN channel
• Select set input for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Select set output for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Select set speed for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Select set for five left, two center, and five right fuel packets for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-95

190-01737-00 Revision A
 • Copy the active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
3.6.4.4 GEA Page Group
Engine Configuration Page

Data
• ALT AMPS 1, 2―Alternator Amps measurement, expressed in amperes.
• PROP D ICE CUR 1, 2―Propeller De-Ice current measurement, expressed in amperes.
• AIRCRFT PWR 1, 2―Aircraft power input measurement, expressed in volts DC.
• BATT VOLTS 1, 2―Battery Voltage measurement, expressed in volts DC.
• ENGINE HOURS―Displays engine time in hours, as measured by the engine tachometer input.
• TACH SENSOR 1, 2―Tachometer sensor measurement, expressed in revolutions per minute (RPM).
• D ICE PRESS―De-Ice system pressure measurement, expressed in pounds per square inch (PSI).
• FUEL PRESS ENG 1, 2―Fuel Pressure measurement, expressed in pounds per square inch (PSI).
• FUEL QTY RIGHT, LEFT―Fuel Quantity measurement, expressed in gallons (GL).
• FUEL FLW ENG 1, 2―Fuel Flow measurement, expressed in gallons per hour (GL/HR).
• MAP ENG 1, 2―Manifold Air Pressure sensor reading, expressed in inches/mercury (“/Hg).
• VAC ENG 1, 2―Vacuum measurement, expressed in inches/mercury (“/Hg).
• OP ENG 1, 2―Oil Pressure, expressed in pounds per square inch (PSI).
• N1, N2, N3 ENG 1, 2―Compressor spool speeds, expressed in percent RPM. (Turbine aircraft only)

Page 3-96 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • EGT ENG 1, 2 (1-6)—Exhaust Gas Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius.
• ITT ENG 1, 2—Interstage Turbine Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius. (Turbine aircraft only)
• TIT ENG 1, 2—Turbine Intake Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius. (Turbine aircraft only)
• OT ENG 1, 2—Oil Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius.
• CHT ENG 1, 2 (1-6)—Cylinder Head Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius.

GEA Status Page

There are nine page modes for the GEA Status page. Each mode is accessible via softkeys and displayed data
is described below:
Main Mode
The GEA Status Configuration page displays the following data for GEA 1, GEA 2, or GEA 3:
• Calibration valid • ROM failure status
• Configuration valid • XILINX failure status
• Internal voltage exceeded flag • RS-485 (1 and 2) failure status
• Main EEPROM failure status • COM channel over utilized status
• EEPROM A failure status • Main board aircraft power #1
• EEPROM B failure status • Main board aircraft power #2
• RAM failure status • Main board internal temperature

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-97

190-01737-00 Revision A
 • Main board external temperature • Input / Output A board +3.3 internal
voltage
• Main board +2.5 reference voltage
• Input / Output A board +5 internal voltage
• Main board +5 external voltage
• Input / Output B board +2.5 reference
• Main board +10 external voltage
voltage
• Main board +12 external voltage
• Input / Output B board -2.1 internal
• Main board -2.1 internal voltage voltage
• Main board +2.5 internal voltage • Input / Output B board +3.3 internal
• Main board +3.3 internal voltage voltage

• Main board +5 internal voltage • Input / Output B board +5 internal voltage

• Main board +5.75 transformer voltage • Input / Output B board -5.75 transformer
voltage
• Main board +13.8 transformer voltage
• Input / Output B board internal
• Main board +30 transformer voltage temperature
• Input / Output A board +2.5 reference • Input / Output B board external
voltage temperature
• Input / Output A board -2.1 internal • Input / Output B board backshell
voltage temperature
Data Viewing Modes
The following input viewing modes is available via softkey:
• Analog/Current
• Analog Input
• Current Monitor
• Engine Temperature
• Backshell Thermocouple
• Annunciator
• Digital Input
• Discrete Input
• For each input viewing mode, the following data is viewable:
• List of each input/output channel for the selected GEA
• Configured data type for each input/output channel
• Data validity of each input/output channel
• Data value of each input/output channel

Page 3-98 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Operations
In addition to the softkey operations, the GEA Status Configuration page allows the following operation:
• Select which GEA to display data for
GEA Configuration Page

Page Security
The GEA Configuration page allows modification after entering the key sequence: (softkey 1, softkey 2, softkey
3, softkey 4)
Data
Display Format 1
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the analog/current monitor in,
analog in, current monitor, engine temperature analog in, and the backshell thermocouples:
• GIA/GEA pair • Set gain
• GEA board • Set HSCM control enabled status
• Channel • Set constant current enabled status
• Set input type • Set resistor divider enabled status
• Set sensor type • Set bipolar enabled status
• Set update rate • Set ground low side enable status

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-99

190-01737-00 Revision A
 • Set parameter 1 • Active HSCM control enabled status
• Set parameter 2 • Active constant current enabled status
• Set parameter 3 • Active resistor divider enabled status
• Set parameter 4 • Active bipolar enabled status
• Set parameter 5 • Active ground low side enabled status
• Set parameter 6 • Active parameter 1
• Set filter • Active parameter 2
• Set hysteresis • Active parameter 3
• Active input type • Active parameter 4
• Active input data value • Active parameter 5
• Active sensor type • Active parameter 6
• Active update rate • Active filter
• Active gain • Active hysteresis
Display Format 2
Digital Channel Display
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the digital channel:
• GIA/GEA pair • Set hysteresis
• GEA board • Active input type
• Channel • Active input data value
• Set input type • Active sensor type
• Set sensor type • Active update rate
• Set update rate • Active parameter 1
• Set parameter 1 • Active parameter 2
• Set parameter 2 • Active parameter 3
• Set parameter 3 • Active parameter 4
• Set parameter 4 • Active parameter 5
• Set parameter 5 • Active parameter 6
• Set parameter 6 • Active filter
• Set filter • Active hysteresis
Digital Channel Configured as a Discrete Channel Display
The GEA Configuration page displays Display Format 3 (see section below) with the following additional data
when viewing data for the digital channel configured as a discrete channel:
• Set sensor type
• Active sensor type

Page 3-100 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Display Format 3
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the discrete
channel:
• GIA/GEA pair • Set inactive debounce time
• GEA board • Active input type
• Channel • Active input data value
• Set input type • Active "active low/high" setting
• Set active low/high setting • Active debounce time
• Set active debounce time • Active inactive debounce time
Display Format 4
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the annunciator channel:
• GIA/GEA pair
• GEA board
• Channel
• Set data type
• Set active low/high setting
• Active data type
• Active data value
• Active "active low/high" setting
Operations
Display Selection
There is a means to change the page to display one of the following via the listed softkey for each option:
• Analog/Current monitor in via the ANLG/CRNT softkey
• Analog in via the ANLG IN softkey
• Current monitor via the CRNT MNTR softkey
• Engine temperature analog in via the ENG TEMP softkey
• Backshell thermocouple via the BKSHELL softkey
• Digital Channel via the DIGITAL softkey
• Annunciator Channel via the ANNUNC softkey
• Discrete Channel via the DISCRETE softkey
Verification
There is a means to initiate a verification process to check each of the following by pressing the VERIFY
softkey:
• Analog/Current monitor in
• Analog in
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-101
190-01737-00 Revision A
 • Current monitor
• Engine temperature analog in
• Backshell thermocouple
• Digital Channel
• Annunciator Channel
• Discrete Channel
Configuration Copying
There is a means to copy the active settings to the set settings and vice versa for the following by pressing the
COPY softkey, then pressing either the THIS CHNL or ALL CHNLS softkey, then pressing the ACTV>SET or
SET>ACTV softkey respectively:
• Analog/Current monitor in
• Analog in
• Current monitor
• Engine temperature analog in
• Backshell thermocouple
• Digital Channel
• Annunciator Channel
• Discrete Channel
Display Format 1
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing data for the analog/current
monitor in, analog in, current monitor, engine temperature analog in, and the backshell thermocouples:
• Select GIA/GEA pair • Select set bipolar enabled status
• Select GEA board • Select ground low side enabled status
• Select channel • Modify set parameter 1
• Select set input type • Modify set parameter 2
• Select set sensor type • Modify set parameter 3
• Select set update rate • Modify set parameter 4
• Select set gain • Modify set parameter 5
• Select set HSCM control enabled status • Modify set parameter 6
• Select set constant current enabled status • Modify set filter
• Select set resistor divider enabled status • Modify set hysteresis
Display Format 2
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing data for the digital channel:
• Select GIA/GEA pair • Select channel
• Select GEA board • Select set input type

Page 3-102 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Select set sensor type • Modify set parameter 4
• Select set update rate • Modify set parameter 5
• Modify set parameter 1 • Modify set parameter 6
• Modify set parameter 2 • Modify set filter
• Modify set parameter 3 • Modify set hysteresis
Display Format 3
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing data for the discrete channel:
• Select GIA/GEA pair
• Select GEA board
• Select channel
• Select set input type
• Select set active low/high setting
• Modify set active debounce time
• Modify set inactive debounce time
Display Format 4
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing data for the annunciator channel:
• Select GIA/GEA pair
• Select GEA board
• Select channel
• Select set data type
• Select set active low/high setting

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-103

190-01737-00 Revision A
3.6.4.5 GTX Page Group
Transponder RS-232 / ARINC 429 Configuration Page

Data
The Transponder RS-232 / ARINC 429 Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current transponder unit selected
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 4
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 outputs 1 and 2
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 4
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 outputs 1 and 2
• Set and active inputs for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
• Set and active outputs for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
Operations
The Transponder RS-232 / ARINC 429 Configuration page allows the following operations via the
softkeys listed or via standard FMS knob and key usage for each field on the page:
• Select transponder unit
• Select set speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 3
• Select set data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 4
• Select set data for ARINC 429 outputs 1 and 2
Page 3-104 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Select set input for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
• Select set output for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copy the active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey

Transponder Configuration Page

Data
The Transponder Configuration page displays the following set data and active data for each configured
transponder:
• Address type • Enhanced surveillance status
• Address • ADS-B transmit mode
• Flight ID type • Aircraft width
• Flight ID • Aircraft length
• Aircraft weight • Surveillance integrity type
• Maximum airspeed
• VFR code
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-105
190-01737-00 Revision A
Operations
The Transponder Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select transponder unit
• Select address type
• Modify address
• Select flight ID type
• Modify flight ID
• Select aircraft weight
• Select maximum airspeed
• Modify VFR code
• Modify enhanced surveillance status
• Modify ADS-B transmit mode
• Modify aircraft width
• Modify aircraft length
• Modify surveillance integrity type
• Copying set data to active data by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copying active data to set data by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey (when only one transponder is
configured)
• Copying transponder #1 active data to set data and transponder #2 active data by pressing the
ACT1>SET softkey (when two transponders are configured)
• Copying transponder #2 active data to set data and transponder #1 active data by pressing the
ACT2>SET softkey (when two transponders are configured)

Page 3-106 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.6.4.6 GRS PAGE GROUP
AHRS/Air Data Input Configuration Page
The page displays a list of all primary data parameters being sent to the GIA’s and GDU’s for attitude
information, and provides a useful cross-reference for predicted values. It displays the digital values for
the information that is fed to the system.

Data
The AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page displays the following data:
• AHRS true heading angle (AHRS 1, 2, Standby)
• AHRS roll and pitch angles (AHRS 1, 2, Standby)
• AHRS X, Y, and Z accelerations (AHRS 1, 2, Standby)
• Air data static air temperatures (ADC 1, 2)
• Air data true and indicated airspeeds (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Air data vertical speed (ADC 1, 2)
• Air data barometric(ADC 1, 2), density (ADC 1, 2), and pressure altitudes (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Air Data Static Pressure (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Air Data Differential Pressure (ADC 1, 2)
• Air Data Mach (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Low Speed Awareness Ratio (ADC 1, 2)
• Green Circle Ratio (ADC 1, 2)
• Yellow Band Ratio (ADC 1, 2)

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-107

190-01737 Revision A
 • Yellow Band Offset (ADC 1, 2)
Operations
• No operations exist for the AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page.
• No menu options exist for the AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page.
• No softkey options exist for the AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page.

GRS/GMU Calibration Page

Page Security
The GRS/GMU Calibration page allows modification after entering the key sequence:
(softkey 9, softkey 10, softkey 11, softkey 12)
Data
The GRS / GMU Calibration Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GRS unit selected
• Current procedure selected
• GPS communication status
• Air data communication status
• Magnetometer communication status
• Pre-calibration checklist
• Calibration instructions
• Angle and tolerance level which aircraft must turn to right (during magnetometer calibration)
• Angle and tolerance level to which aircraft must turn (during heading offset calibration)
• Number of seconds to hold aircraft's current position (during magnetometer and heading offset
calibrations)
• Calibration checklist (during pitch / roll offset calibration)
• Calibration status (displayed at appropriate times during each calibration)
• Engine run-up test results (displayed at end of engine run-up test)
• Magnetometer interference test results (displayed at end of magnetometer interference test)

Page 3-108 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Primary engine instrumentation window with the thumbnail disabled (see the airframe specific
requirements document; all supported airframe requirements documents are listed in GDU-
SsSWR)
Operations
The GRS / GMU Calibration Configuration page allows the following operations for each field on the page:
• Select a GRS unit from the GRS drop-down list
• Select procedure (pitch/roll offset, magnetometer, heading offset, engine run-up test,
magnetometer interference test) from the procedure drop-down list
• Confirm each item in pre-calibration checklist by highlighting the row and pressing ENT, which
toggles the status box for that row from black to green
• Confirm user is ready to start the procedure by pressing ENT on each verification step, then
selecting the CONFIRM field, then pressing ENT
• Confirm user is at instructed heading (during heading offset calibration)
• Confirm each item in calibration checklist (during pitch / roll calibration)
• Confirm aircraft is level (during pitch / roll offset calibration)
• Confirm user is aware of calibration status (upon error or success of each calibration) by
requiring ENT press before continuing
• Confirm user is aware of engine run-up test results (upon success or failure) by requiring ENT
press before continuing
• Confirm user is aware of magnetometer interference test results (upon success or failure) by
requiring ENT press before continuing the units, the GMU 44 has failed or a GRS communication
port failure.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-109

190-01737 Revision A
3.6.4.7 ADC Page Group
ADC Configuration Page

Page Security
GDU airspeed filter time constants, GDU airspeed filter transition points, GDU vertical speed filter time
constant, GDU airspeed anticipation gain and maximum, and altitude and airspeed error correction alert
statuses are only displayed and editable with an enablement card.
Data
The ADC Configuration page displays the following data:
• Status of the altitude 1 error correction alert
• Status of the altitude 2 error correction alert
• Status of the airspeed 1 error correction alert
• Status of the airspeed 2 error correction alert
• GDU airspeed filter time constants (low, high)
• GDU airspeed filter time constant airspeed transition points (to low, to high)
• GDU vertical speed filter time constant
• GDU airspeed anticipation gain and GDU airspeed anticipation maximum
Operations
The ADC Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Enable or disable the altitude 1 error correction alert
• Enable or disable the altitude 2 error correction alert
• Enable or disable the airspeed 1 error correction alert
• Enable or disable the airspeed 2 error correction alert
• Edit GDU airspeed filter time constants
• Edit GDU airspeed filter time constant airspeed transition points (to low, to high)

Page 3-110 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Edit GDU vertical speed filter time constant
• Edit GDU airspeed anticipation gain
• Edit GDU airspeed anticipation maximum
GDC Configuration Page

GDC Configuration
Security
x The GDC configuration page allows modification of the OAT selected after entering the key
sequence: (softkey 1, softkey 4, softkey 7, softkey 10).
x The current aircraft is only editable with an unlock card.
x The OAT selected is editable with an unlock card.
x The GDC airspeed and vertical speed time constants are only displayed with an unlock card.
Data
The GDC Configuration page displays the following data:
x Current GDC unit selected
x Current aircraft selected
x Current OAT selected
x GDC airspeed filter time constant
x GDC vertical speed filter time constant
Operations
The GDC Configuration page allows the following operations via standard FMS knob and key
usage for each field on the page:
x Select a GDC unit from the GDC unit drop-down list
x Select aircraft
x Select OAT
Menu Definitions
No menu options exist for the GDC Configuration page.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-111

190-01737 Revision A
Softkey Definitions
No softkey options exist for the GDC Configuration page.

3.6.4.8 GMA Page Group

• GMA Status Page

• GMA Volume Configuration Page
• GMA Squelch Configuration Page
• GMA Options Page
• GMA Marker Beacon Configuration Page

GMA Status Page

Data
• Selected GMA unit
Status
• Unit Type
• Power Cycles
• Power Hours
Page 3-112 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • CPU1 Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU1 RAM Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 RAM Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU1 NonVol Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 NonVol Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU1 Electrical Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 Electrical Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• FPGA Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Key Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Audio Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Routing Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Clip Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
Discrete In
• CPU1 GMA2 Strap Value (Low = GMA1, High = GMA2)
• CPU2 GMA2 Strap Value (Low = GMA1, High = GMA2)
• Pilot Push-To-Command Value
• Copilot Push-To-Command Value
• Passenger Push-To-Command Value
• Pilot Stereo Headset Short Status - Left and Right side (green check equals no short)
• Copilot Stereo Headset Short Status - Left and Right side (green check equals no short)
• Passenger Stereo Headset Short Status - Left and Right side (green check equals no short)
• Pilot Push-To-Talk Value
• Copilot Push-To-Talk Value
• Generic Inputs 1-10 Values
Discrete Out
• Exit Fail Safe Status (green check equals unit is out of fail safe mode)
• Middle Marker Sensitivity Value
• Digital Onside Push-To-Talk 1 Value
• Digital Onside Push-To-Talk 2 Value
• Digital Cross side Push-To-Talk 1 Value
• Digital Cross side Push-To-Talk 2 Value
• COM1 Microphone Key Value
• COM2 Microphone Key Value
• Generic Outputs A-G Values
• Generic Lamps A-C Values
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-113
190-01737 Revision A
Voltage
GMA Voltages
• Aircraft1 Supply Voltage Value
• Aircraft2 Supply Voltage Value
• 12 Volt Supply Monitor Value
• +12 Volt Supply Monitor Value
• -12 Volt Supply Monitor Value
Temperature
• Current Temperature (in Celsius)
• Minimum Temperature (in Celsius)
• Maximum Temperature (in Celsius)

GMA Volume Configuration Page

Data
• Selected GMA Unit
• Selected Volume Configuration Type
• Selected Output Range To Be Displayed
Volume Configuration
A lookup table representing the adjustable volume configuration setting for any specified input/output
pair. The actual setting is equivalent to the value in the top row (the output) + the value in the leftmost
column (the input) + the intersection point. Each of these settings are individually displayed in the
following manner:
• The value in the top row (output). This value will affect all inputs for that output.
• The value in the left column (input). This value will affect all outputs for that input.
Page 3-114 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • The value at an intersection. This value will only affect that individual input/output pairing.
Operations
The Digital GMA Volume Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Select Volume Configuration Type (Minimum or Maximum)
• Select Output Range to be Displayed (1-24 or 25-48)
A lookup table representing the adjustable volume configuration setting for any specified input/output
pair. The actual setting is equivalent to the value in the top row (the output) + the value in the leftmost
column (the input) + the intersection point. Each of these settings can be individually modified in the
following manner:
• Modifying the value in the top row (output) will affect all inputs for that output.
• Modifying the value in the left column (input) will affect all outputs for that input.
• Modifying the value at an intersection will only affect that individual input/output pairing.
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey

GMA Squelch Configuration Page

Data
SELECTED GMA UNIT
AUDIO CONFIGURATION
• Set and active squelch threshold for all 95 inputs
NOTE: This value represents the volume the input must receive to break squelch.
• Set and active squelch persistence for all 95 inputs

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-115

190-01737 Revision A
NOTE: This value represents the length of time the input volume must be below the squelch threshold to
close squelch once it has been broken.
Operations
The Digital GMA Squelch Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Modify the set configuration for the squelch threshold for any of the 95 inputs (Decibels)
NOTE: This value represents the volume the input must receive to break squelch.
• Modify the set configuration for the squelch persistence for any of the 95 inputs (milliseconds)
NOTE: This value represents the length of time the input volume must be below the squelch threshold to
close squelch once it has been broken.
GMA Options Configuration Page

Data
The Digital GMA Options Configuration page displays the following data:
Selected GMA Unit
Audio Configuration
• Text string for any of the 256 generic audio configuration options
• Set and active configuration setting for any of the 256 generic audio configuration options
Operations
The Digital GMA Options Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Modify the set configuration setting for any of the 256 generic audio configuration options (User,
On, or Off)
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copy active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
• Selected GMA unit
Page 3-116 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Set and active setting for the disablement of the high sensitivity discrete
• Set and active audio offset threshold
• Set and active audio off debounce
• Set and active HI sensitivity offset
• Set and active LO sensitivity offset
GMA Marker Beacon Configuration Page

Data
The Digital GMA Marker Beacon Configuration page displays the following data:
Selected GMA Unit
Marker Beacon
• Set and active setting for the disablement of the high sensitivity discrete
• Set and active audio offset threshold
• Set and active audio off debounce
• Set and active HI sensitivity offset
• Set and active LO sensitivity offset
Operations
The Digital GMA Marker Beacon Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Modify the set configuration for the disablement of the high sensitivity discrete
• Modify the set configuration for the audio offset threshold (Decibels)
NOTE: This value represents how soon the pilot will hear the marker beacon tone before the marker
beacon light illuminates.
• Modify the set configuration for the audio off debounce (milliseconds)
NOTE: The value represents how long the modulated marker beacon signal can drop below the audio
offset threshold value before the marker beacon tone will stop (very similar to squelch persistence).
• Modify the set configuration for the HI sensitivity offset value (unit less)
• Modify the set configuration for the LO sensitivity offset value (unit less)
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-117

190-01737 Revision A
3.6.4.9 GDL Page Group
GDL 69 Configuration Page

Configuration
• SELECT GDL ANTENNA―selects the GDL antenna.
• ANTENNA GAIN (LOWER dB)―sets the antenna gain value.
• CABLE LOSS INCLUDING INLINE ATTENUATIONS IF USED (NOMINAL dB)―Sets the inline cable loss
attenuation value.
• GDL CONFIGURABLE ATTENUATION (dB)―sets the desired GDL attenuation value.
• ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, 4―enables and/or disables the desired Ethernet port.
NOTE
‘AUDIO RADIO’ refers to the XM audio receiver installed in the GDL 69A. ‘DATA RADIO’
refers to the XM data receiver installed in both the GDL 69 and GDL 69A.
Data
• ID―displays the identification number for the GDL 69A.
• ACTIVE―displays the active status for the GDL 69A.
• SIGNAL―displays the signal level for the GDL 69A:
0 – no signal
1 – weak signal
2 – adequate signal
3 – good signal

Page 3-118 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 NOTE
Levels 2 and 3 should allow for proper operation of all GDL 69A audio and weather
options. Levels 0 and 1 are likely indications of problems with availability. A “204”
message in the signal field indicates that signal information has not initialized.
Diagnostics (For XM use only, not useful for troubleshooting)
• QUALITY OF SERVICE―displays the quality of service for the GDL 69A.
• TERRESTRIAL ERROR STATUS―displays the terrestrial error status for the GDL 69A.
• SATELLITE 1 ERROR―displays the error status for satellite 1.
• SATELLITE 2 ERROR―displays the error status for satellite 2.
• TUNER STATUS―displays the tuner status for the GDL 69A.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-119

190-01737 Revision A
GDL 59 Status Page

Hardware Statistics
The GDL 59 hardware statistics are displayed, including:
• The current system temperature in Celsius
• The maximum overall system temperature in Celsius
• The minimum overall system temperature in Celsius
• The unit power up count
• The unit power on time in hours
• The hardware version of the main GDL59 board
• The hardware version of the memory board on the GDL59
Discrete
The GDL 59 discrete data is displayed, including:
• System ID pin status
• Attached GSR56 #1 or #2's heat OK status
• POTS phone on hook status
Hardware Failures
The GDL 59 hardware failures is displayed, including:
• If the system temperature reading is invalid
• If the system temperature is too high
• If the system temperature is too low
• If the system NAND (flash memory) has failed
• If the memory board NAND (flash memory) has failed
• If the Wi-Fi module has failed
• If the system hardware statistics detection has failed

Page 3-120 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Voltage Range Monitor
The voltage monitor readings and failure statuses is displayed for all voltage monitors, which include:
• +24V (in millivolts)
• +12V (in millivolts)
• +5V (in millivolts)
• +3.3V (in millivolts)
• +3.2V (in millivolts)
• +2.5V (in millivolts)
• +1.8V (in millivolts)
• +1.3V (in millivolts)
• -5V (in millivolts)
• -12V (in millivolts)
• Aircraft power A (in millivolts)
• Aircraft power B (in millivolts)
• Fan (in milliamperes)
• POTS battery (in millivolts)

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-121

190-01737 Revision A
GDL 59 Configuration Page

Enabled Functionality
The GDL 59H functionality that is enabled by configuration is displayed, including:
• Data logging/report functionality
• Voice communication
• Wi-Fi communication
Phone Settings
• The set and active setting for if the GDL59's audio system 1 phone is connected is displayed
• The set and active setting for if the GDL59's POTS phone is connected is displayed
Volume Settings
The set and active volume in and volume out in percentage for all GDL59 phones is displayed, including:
• POTS for the internal phone in the cabin
• AUD 1 for the internal cockpit phone
• IRIDIUM 1 for the external GSR56 #1 phone
• IRIDIUM 2 for the external GSR56 #2 phone
• TONE for the playback of tones (volume out only)
• FLIGHT VOICE LOG for the FVL (flight voice logger) microphone (volume in only)
The audio system 1 (cockpit phone) status is displayed, including:
• IDLE if the phone not busy
• RINGING if a call is incoming
• DIAL TONE if there is a dial tone
• WAITING if a phone dialed is busy
• DIALING when calling another phone
Page 3-122 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • CONNECTED when talking with another phone
• FAILED if the phone has failed
• DISCONNECTING if the phone is closing a connection
• UNKNOWN if an unspecified phone status was provided or if there is no communication about
the phone status
If the audio system 1 (cockpit phone) status is CONNECTED, the phone that audio system 1 is connected
to is displayed, including:
• POTS for the internal phone in the cabin
• IRIDIUM 1 for the external GSR56 #1 phone
• IRIDIUM 2 for the external GSR56 #2 phone
• CONFERENCE if connected to more than one phone
• UNKNOWN if no connected phone(s) was specified or if connected to unspecified phones
Operations
The following operations are available on the GDL59 Configuration Page:
• Whether or not the GDL59's audio system 1 is connected is selectable
• Whether or not the GDL59's audio system 1 is connected is only be selectable if voice
functionality is enabled for the GDL59
• Whether or not the GDL59's POTS is connected is selectable
• Whether or not the GDL59's POTS is connected is only selectable if voice functionality is enabled
for the GDL59
The volume in and volume out percentages for all GDL59 phones is modifiable, including:
• POTS for the internal phone in the cabin
• AUD 1 for the internal cockpit phone
• IRIDIUM 1 for the external GSR56 #1 phone
• IRIDIUM 2 for the external GSR56 #2 phone
• TONE for the playback of tones (volume out only)
• FLIGHT VOICE LOG for the FVL (flight voice logger) microphone (volume in only)
• Modification of set volume in and volume out percentages for all GDL59 phones is disabled if
voice functionality is disabled for the GDL59
• The cockpit phone is able to be commanded to dial by pressing the DIAL softkey
• The phone number pop-up page is used to collect the number to dial
The DIAL softkey is enabled for the cockpit phone when all of the following are true:
• The phone status is IDLE or DIAL TONE
• There is another phone configured as available besides the cockpit phone
• The cockpit phone is able to commanded to end calls by pressing the HANGUP softkey
The HANGUP softkey is enabled for the cockpit phone when any of the following are true:
• The phone status is RINGING

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-123

190-01737 Revision A
 • The phone status is WAITING
• The phone status is DIALING
• The phone status is CONNECTED
• The phone status is FAILED
• The phone status is DIAL TONE
• The GDL59 is able to be commanded to play or stop a tone on all GDL59 phones for volume
adjustment by toggling the TONE softkey
• The TONE softkey is disabled if there is no communication about the cockpit phone status
• Set information is able to be copied to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• A confirmation page is displayed asking if a user is sure they want to activate parameter settings
when the copy set information to active information operation is initially triggered
• Active information is able to be copied to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
• A confirmation page is displayed asking if a user is sure they want to copy active settings when
the copy active information to set information operation is initially triggered
Related Functionality
Each cockpit phone command sent to the GDL59 is verified, displaying a message when the following
errors occur:
• A generic error occurred while processing the dial phone command
• A generic error occurred while processing the hang-up phone command
• The phone command timed out
Each tone command sent to the GDL59 is verified, displaying a message when the following errors occur:
• A generic error occurred while processing the tone command
• The tone command timed out

Page 3-124 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
GSR 56 (Iridium) Configuration Page

Configuration
The set and active values for whether or not the GSR 56 is configured to be available is displayed by
displaying what the GSR56 is connected through, including:
• GIA1 (N/A for active data)
• GIA2 (N/A for active data)
• GDL59
• NONE
• UNKNOWN (for active data only)
Permission Level
The set and active permission level of the GSR56 is displayed, including:
• NONE if the GSR 56H has no permissions
• VOICE if the GSR 56 can perform voice communication
• DATA if the GSR 56 can perform data communication
• SMS if the GSR 56 can perform SMS text message communication
• UNKNOWN (for active data only)
Enabled Functionality
The set and active GSR 56 functionality that is enabled is displayed, including:
• Whether or not voice communication is prioritized over data communication
• The set default international code shall be displayed
Operations
Operations available on the GSR 56 Configuration Page are as follows:
• The default international code is modifiable.
• Default international code's can only be composed of the following characters:
o Digits "0" through "9"
o The pound key "#"
o The star key "*"

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-125

190-01737 Revision A
3.6.4.10 GTS Page Group
GTS Configuration Page

Data
The GTS Configuration page displays the following data:
GTS fault flags (a positive indicator showing no fault, a negative indicator showing fault, an unknown
indicator showing unknown fault status)
• Calibration
• Configuration
• FPGA
• ROM
• Execution
• Electrical
• Whisper Shout
• Transmit Power
• 1030 MHz
• 1090 MHz
• PA/LNA
Page 3-126 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 • Receiver
• Transmitter
• Baro Altitude
• Temperature
• TCAS Equip Timeout
• Radio Altitude
GTS Status
• A text field showing selected GTS unit type
• A text field showing temperature (Celsius degrees with 0.1 Celsius degree precision)
• A text field showing radio altitude availability
• A button for the GTS audio test
• A button for the GTS self-test
• A text field labeled "DATA LOG ENABLED" if the GTS data log is enabled
Configuration
• Set and active top antenna
• Set and active top antennal cable loss (decibels with 0.1 decibel precision)
• Set and active bottom antenna
• Set and active bottom antenna cable loss (decibels with 0.1 decibel precision)
• Set and active mode s address
• Set and active volume (decibels with 0.5 decibel precision)
• Set and active voice
• Set and active ADS-B TX
• Set and active landing gear
Operations
The GTS Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Copy set information to active information by pressing the Enter key or SET>ACTV softkey.
• Copy active information to set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey.
• Modify top antenna by choosing one of the following antenna types :
o Garmin GA58
o Sensor systems
o Modify top antenna cable loss
o Modify bottom antenna by choosing one of the following antenna types:
• None
• Monopole
• Garmin GA58
• Sensor systems
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-127
190-01737 Revision A
Modify bottom antenna cable loss
Modify volume
Modify voice by choosing one of the following options:
• Male
• Female
Modify ADS-B TX by choosing one of the following options:
• Installed
• Not Installed
Modify landing gear by choosing one of the following gear types:
• Fixed
• Retractable
• Test GTS audio system by pressing "Audio Test" button.
• Test GTS TCAS test mode by pressing "Run Self-Test" button.

3.6.4.11 Other Page Group

Stormscope Configuration Page (if installed)

Refer to Bell/Stormscope data for a description of the Stormscope configuration page.

Page 3-128 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7 ADDITIONAL TROUBLESHOOTING
3.7.1 COM

Com Squelch Calibration

COM Calibration Squelch is not a required procedure and is generally not performed during installation
or maintenance but can be used to adjust COM receiver 25kHz/8.33kHz squelch settings if needed. If the
COM squelch opens after performing this procedure, the aircraft’s electrical system may be noisy causing
the COM squelch to open. Find the source of electrical system noise and correct (electrical motors are a
common source of interference). Desensitizing the COM squelch to prevent it from opening due to
electrical system noise may reduce the receiving range of the COM.
To set COM squelch threshold:
1. Connect a ground power unit to the aircraft.
2. Disconnect GIA COM antenna connector at the back of the GIA rack and connect an RF generator.
x For 25kHz frequency spacing; set the RF generator to 2.0μV hard, modulated 30% at
1000Hz.
x For 8.33kHz frequency spacing; set the RF generator to 3.0μV hard, modulated 30% at
1000Hz.
3. Turn on the system and allow to initialize in normal mode.
4. Turn off the PFD and MFD by pulling their circuit breakers.
5. Restart the PFD and MFD in configuration mode.
6. On the PFD, turn to the COM SETUP page:

1. Activate the cursor and select the desired tuning frequency using the FMS knobs. Only the
frequencies 118.00, 127.00, & 136.975 may be used when setting squelch and sidetone levels.
NOTE: at least one of the three tuning frequencies must be entered in order to make the
COM squelch and sidetone adjustments; if not, the fields below EMERGENCY VOL will not be
displayed:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-129

190-01737 Revision A
 2. Select GIA1 or GIA2 in the COM Setup window. This forces an update of the calibration data
values and must be accomplished prior to making any changes. Failure to do so may allow COM
calibration values to be inadvertently stored into incorrect memory locations requiring GIA
replacement.
3. For 25kHz operation, adjust the SQ 250 value. It may be set to any value between 0 (zero) and 63.
The higher the number, the less signal is required to break squelch.

4. For 8.33kHz operation, adjust the SQ 833 value. It may be set to any value between 0 (zero) and
63. The higher the number, the more signal is required to break squelch.

5. After the squelch value is adjusted to the desired number, press the ENT key. A COMPLETE
message is displayed. Press ENT.
Page 3-130 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 6. Repeat steps for tuning additional frequencies.

3.7.2 GPS Troubleshooting

GPS Receiver Operation
Each GIA 63H Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the
specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status
Page.
Internal system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the
PFD. In some circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may
be providing a better GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the
better solution is automatically coupled to the PFD. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” are then
displayed in the Reversionary Sensor Window indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS
receivers are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that
particular time.
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite
Based Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked
by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne,
turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal. If the sensor
annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1. Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2. Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX - GPS Status Page.
3. To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
1. Press the MENU Key.
2. Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-131

190-01737 Revision A
GPS Status Page

Figure 3-4. GPS Status Page

The GPS Status Page provides the following information:

• Satellite constellation diagram
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle
representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead. Each
satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite signal information status
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of
Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of
laying. EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement. DOP measures satellite
geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to each other) on a range
Page 3-132 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM, measures of horizontal
and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values
reported by the GPS receiver. The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and
track for the aircraft are displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
• GPS receiver status
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the
process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that
should be in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been
acquired for computing a solution. When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS
solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS
(Satellite-Based Augmentation System) indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution
status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS indicates ACTIVE.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is pressed)
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected
approach may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction
for the intended approach. Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function
that performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite
geometry allows the receive to calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical
miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During
oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM
prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time. Because of
the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The system
automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as
indicated by the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is
not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar
is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for
WAAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by
signal bar appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow)
before the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-133

190-01737 Revision A
The following table lists recommended actions to take if the GPS is not acquiring satellites.

Fault Recommended Action

GPS will not acquire satellites
1. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone/Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
technology is not turned on (even in a monitoring state) in the cabin.
2. Using the MFD AUX – GPS Status page, verify the signal strength bars
are not erratic. If so, this indicates outside interference is affecting
the GPS receivers. Find and remove the source of interference (i.e.
cell phones, FBO datalink antennas, etc.).
3. Check date and time on Date/Time Setup Page. If date and time are
incorrect, enter the correct date and time.
4. Switch GIA1 and GIA2 to verify location of problem.
5. If problem follows unit, clear the GPS almanac by performing the
following steps:
x Using the PFD1 in config mode, go to the GIA RS-232/ARNIC
429 Config Page.
x At the top of the screen, select the GIA that cannot acquire
satellites (GIA1 or GIA2) and press the ENT key.
x Press the “CLR NV” softkey at the bottom of the screen.
x Select “OK” in the “Clear GIA nonvolatile memory?” pop-up
window.
x Next reload GIA Audio and Config files from a loader card. Be
sure to reload the config files for any optional equipment
installed on the aircraft that require the GIA config to be
updated.
x Cycle power on the system and allow it to restart in normal
mode. Place the aircraft outside and allow 15-30 minutes for
the GPS to acquire a position and download a new almanac.
6. If clearing nonvolatile memory is unsuccessful and the GPS still
cannot acquire a position, replace the GIA.
7. If problem does not follow unit, check GPS antenna and cabling.

Page 3-134 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7.3 GDC 74H Troubleshooting

The following table lists common GDC 74H faults and recommended actions to take.

Fault Recommended Action

Altitude is different than
1. Perform a pitot/static check (see Bell maintenance manual for
standby altimeter
procedure). Allow the GDC 74H to warm up for fifteen minutes before
checking accuracy.
2. Determine which instrument is outside limits and recalibrate or
replace. Note: Both units may individually be in spec but show a
difference in altitude. Do not return a unit to Garmin for service if not
outside limits.
3. If GDC is outside limits, recalibrate according to the procedure in
Section 6.
GDC Config file does not load.
1. Replace GDC config module.
2. If problem persists, replace GDC config module wire harness.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-135

190-01737 Revision A
3.7.4 GRS 77H AHRS and GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting

GRS 77H Common Faults

In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77H AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and
air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and
magnetic field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the
AHRS uses air data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available
(see Figure 3-x) and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or
magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
GPS Input Failure
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other
GPS receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs
fail, the AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and
magnetometer inputs are available and valid.
Air Data Input Failure
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
Magnetometer Failure
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading
output on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).

Page 3-136 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 3-5. AHRS Operation

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-137

190-01737 Revision A
3.7.4.1 AHRS Troubleshooting Table
The following table lists AHRS common faults and recommended actions to take to correct a fault.

FAULT RECOMMENDED ACTION

AHRS does not complete 1. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone
initialization technology is not turned on (even in a monitoring state) in
the cabin.
2. Ensure GPS has acquired at least four satellites, has a 3D
navigation solution, and a DOP of less than 5.0. This is
particularly important if this issue appears during ground
operation only.

3. If the message ‘Calibrate AHRS/Mag’ is present, perform the

GRS/GMU Calibration.
4. Check GRS 77H configuration module wiring for damage.
5. Check GRS 77H connector for bent pins. If no damage can be
found, replace GRS 77H configuration module.
6. If problem persists, replace the GRS 77H.
Attitude appears unstable 1. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone
technology is not turned on (even in a monitoring state) in
the cabin.
2. Ensure the four GRS 77H mounting screws are tight. Finger
tight is not sufficient, a screwdriver must be used to verify.
3. Ensure mounting rack and airframe shelf are secure and all
hardware and brackets are present (CAUTION - do not loosen
the mounting rack hardware to the airframe shelf or the
aircraft will need to be re-leveled and the PITCH/ROLL
OFFSET procedure performed).
4. Ensure GRS 77H connector is securely fastened and proper
strain relief is provided.
5. Remove GRS 77H connector and verify there are no bent
pins.
6. Replace the GRS 77H.
7. Contact Garmin for further troubleshooting if required.

Page 3-138 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7.4.2 GRS 77H Operational Modes
In order to compute valid pitch and roll outputs, the GRS 77H requires valid GPS information or valid
inputs from both the magnetometer and air data computer. In order to compute valid heading outputs,
the GRS 77H requires valid input from the magnetometer. Insufficient inputs will prevent the AHRS from
initializing. See the following table for the attitude and heading outputs the GRS can provide based on
the available data inputs.

GRS 77H Input GRS 77H Output

GRS 77H Mode GPS GMU 44 GDC 7400 Heading Pitch Roll
Data Data Data
Primary Doesn’t
Good Good Valid Valid Valid
matter
Reversion No-GPS Bad Good Good Valid Valid Valid
Reversion No-Mag Bad or
Good Good Invalid Valid Valid
anomaly
Reversion No-Mag No- Bad or
Good Bad Invalid Valid Valid
Air anomaly
Coast On Gyros Bad Either or Both Bad Invalid Invalid Invalid
Output Unreliable Bad Either or Both Bad Invalid Invalid Invalid

For reports of difficulty associated with AHRS realignment in flight, ensure that the pitch and roll limits
listed in table above are not being violated. The table below shows the pitch and roll limits that the pilot
must maintain for the AHRS to realign itself. If the pilot was performing maneuvers outside these limits,
it can delay indefinitely the reinitialization of the GRS.

3.7.4.3 GRS 77H Pitch/Bank Limits for Cold Start when Airborne

Sensor Inputs Available and Valid

Mode of Operation Entered All GPS MMAG Air Bank Pitch Limit in
Following Initialization Inertials Data Limit in Degrees
Degrees
Primary Mode YES YES YES YES r 20.0 r 5.0
Reversion – No GPS Mode YES NO YES YES r 10.0 r 5.0
Reversion – No GMU 44
YES YES NO YES r 10.0 r 5.0
Mode
Reversion – No GMU 44 and
YES YES NO NO r 10.0 r 5.0
No Air Data Mode

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-139

190-01737 Revision A
3.7.4.4 GRS 77H Troubleshooting Questions for the Operator
If possible, ask the operator the following questions to help gather the information to accurately
troubleshoot the GRS 77H.

1. What specifically was the nature of the failure? Was it a red x of only heading, only pitch/roll, or
both?
2. If there was a red x of pitch or roll information, did the PFD display the "AHRS Align: Keep Wings
Level" message (which is indicative of an AHRS reset), or the "Attitude Fail" message (which is
indicative of either AHRS invalidating its output, or a communication path failure)?
3. What exactly was the aircraft doing in the two minutes that preceded the failure (taxing on the
ground, flying straight-and-level flight, turning, climbing, etc)? If the problem occurred on the
ground, was in within 100 feet of a hanger using GPS repeaters?
4. How long did the failure last? Was it brief or sustained? Was it repetitive in nature? If it was
repetitive, about how many times did it happen? Did it happen on more than one day?
5. Was the problem correlated with a specific maneuver or a specific geographic area?
6. Can the problem be repeated reliably?
7. Were any of the following message advisory alerts observed within an hour of the occurrence of
the problem?
• AHRS not receiving airspeed
• AHRS using backup GPS source
• AHRS not receiving any GPS information
• AHRS not receiving backup GPS information
• AHRS magnetic-field model out of date
• AHRS extended operation in no-GPS mode
8. Did the onset of the problem occur shortly after a software upload to one or more system LRU, or
shortly after a repeat of the magnetometer calibration procedure?
9. Was a cell phone on in the aircraft at the time?
10. Were there any GPS Alert messages or loss of position lock?

Page 3-140 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7.4.5 GRS Troubleshooting on the Aircraft
1. Review the airframe logbook. See if any system, other avionics or electrical maintenance had
been recently performed.
2. Check power wire connections at the circuit breakers. Loose wire terminals can cause
intermittent power glitches. Also, check for intermittent circuit breakers.
3. Have ground power put on the aircraft. Power on the system and record the system software
level on the MFD AUX – System Status Page. This will be needed if assistance from Garmin
Product Support is required.
4. After the system has initialized (about one minute from power on), note any red x’s on the
displays, Alert messages and red x’s on the System Status Page.
5. Try to verify the issue still exists before proceeding to the physical inspection that follows.
6. Turn off the system and gain access to the GRS 77H.
7. Is the connector tight and locking slider engaged to the locking tabs on each side of the GRS
connector?
8. Is the wire harness loose and able to move around during flight? This condition may cause
the wire to pull on or vibrate the connector making intermittent connections.
9. Is the GRS mounted tight to the rack? If any doubt exists, use a screwdriver to check the
tightness of the four mounting screws.
10. Look around the GRS for any heavy objects that may not be fastened tight to the structure
that could induce GRS vibration.
11. Look for evidence of water or fluid contamination in the area around the GRS.
12. Unplug the GRS connector and check for bent pins.
13. Inspect the wire harness clamp on the rear of the connector to verify it’s not too tight and
damaging wires. Also check for some sort of protective wire wrap between the wires and the
clamp. If the wire clamp is installed upside down, it has sharp edges that can cut into the
wires.
14. Verify the locking slider spring is strong enough to keep the slider in the locked position by
cycling the slider.
15. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone/Wi-Fi/Bluetooth technology is not
turned on (even in a monitoring state) in the cabin.
16. Ensure metal objects (tool boxes, power carts, etc.) are not interfering with the
magnetometer and aircraft is not in hangar, near other buildings, parked over metal drainage
culverts or on hard surfaces that may contain steel reinforcements
17. Check for software or failed data path error messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
18. Ensure the GRS 77H unit connecter is secure and proper wire harness strain relief is provided.
19. Ensure the GRS 77H is fastened down tightly in its mounting rack and that the mounting rack
is not loose (CAUTION - do not loosen the mounting rack hardware to the airframe shelf or
the aircraft will need to be re-leveled and the PITCH/ROLL OFFSET procedure performed).
20. Cycle GRS 77H power to restart initialization.
21. Ensure GPS has acquired at least four satellites, has a 3D navigation solution, and a DOP of
less than 5.0. This is particularly important for an ATTITUDE FAIL that appears during ground
operation only.
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-141
190-01737 Revision A
 22. Perform an Engine Run-Up Test to check if engine vibration is causing the GRS 77H to
invalidate outputs or reset.
23. Perform the Magnetic Interference Test to determine if there is significant magnetic
interference from some device on the aircraft.
24. Replace the GRS 77H.
25. If problem persists, replace the GRS 77H Configuration Module.
If the condition is not resolved by following these instructions, contact Garmin Product Support for
additional assistance. In certain cases, a Garmin Field Service Engineer may need to visit your facility to
retrieve the fault logs stored in the GRS to determine if the fault is in the GRS or the aircraft.

Page 3-142 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7.4.6 GMU 44 Magnetometer- Heading Red x
For heading issues, a heading red x (steady or intermittent) is the typical fault indication. Normally there
will also be a green check mark on the MFD System Status Page for the GMU, indicating that the GRS 77H
and the GMU 44 are operating.
In addition to the troubleshooting information provided in the beginning of this section, the technician
should be aware of the following AHRS system characteristics during ground operation that could cause
the red x.
This is important if the operator finds the red x only occurring during ground operations. GRS 77H ground
operation is heavily dependent on GPS data inputs. Be sure to correct any GPS performance problems
(i.e. interference caused by some types of cell phones/Wi-Fi/Bluetooth, GPS repeaters or any other device
that transmits in the area before troubleshooting the GRS 77H/GMU 44. For GPS data to be considered
valid, the receiver must be tracking at least 4 satellites and have a 3D GPS Solution.
When taxiing without reliable GPS information, heading performance is susceptible to the presence of
magnetic anomalies (metal buildings, underground steel culverts, steel grates in the ramp). Localized
sources of interference on the ground may consistently red x the heading in the same spot while taxiing,
this is not caused by a failure of the GMU 44 or its calibration. If no observable steel structures are
present, the red x is most likely caused by an unseen underground disturbance. To confirm this, the
heading will repeatedly red x in the same area during multiple taxi runs. The GRS 77H may invalidate (red
x) the heading if the following are present: it does not have GPS information, it senses a magnetic
anomaly and senses aircraft movement. Remove those influences to determine if one of them caused
the red x.
When the aircraft is on the ground and stationary, the aircraft yaw rate must be less than 1.5
degrees/second to use GPS track information to determine heading. This logic is applied regardless of
magnetic anomaly detection. This could cause a heading red x if the aircraft is moving due to wind,
operators entering/exiting the aircraft or any other disturbance that moves the wings and tail.

3.7.4.7 GMU Communications

The GMU status on the MFD System Status Page indicates the health of the GRS 77H to GMU 44 RS-232
data path. If a red x is present for the GMU, check the RS-232 data path for faults before replacing any
unit.

3.7.4.8 GRS 77H Calibration Message

Figure 3-6. Calibrate AHRS/MAG Message

The external installation configuration parameters are not considered calibrated - these parameters are
categorized into 2 sets: AHRS installation, and magnetic installation parameters. If any one of the two is
“NOT CALIBRATED”, the GRS 77H heading, pitch, and roll may all be flagged as invalid or a message
displayed (as shown above). Perform the required post-installation calibration procedures. If the
calibration is unsuccessful, the GRS configuration module may require replacement since it stores the
calibration information.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-143

190-01737 Revision A
3.7.4.9 GRS/GMU Calibration
Section 6 contains GRS/GMU calibration procedures.

3.7.5 GDL 69AH Troubleshooting

This section describes common faults that may be encountered with the GDL 69A along with
corresponding actions to take.

3.7.5.1 GDL 69AH Error Messages

The following table lists GDL 69 error massages, message location, and description of the message.

Page 3-144 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7.5.2 GDL 69AH Common Faults
The following table lists common faults of the GDL 69A and recommended actions to take.
Fault Recommended Actions
No XM audio is heard
Ensure the following items are not preventing the audio panel from
No XM weather information is
distributing XM audio (reference G1000H Pilot’s Guide):
displayed
1. Verify the XM volume is not muted on the AUX – XM RADIO page on
the MFD. Verify the COM squelch is not open. Verify the ICS squelch is
not open. Verify the marker beacon tones are not being received.
Verify the headphone (if equipped) volume is turned up.
2. Verify the traffic, audio tone generator or other unmuted input is not
active to the GMA audio panel.
3. Go to the AUX – SYSTEM STATUS page on the MFD and ensure unit is
online. If a red X is present, verify the unit is receiving power at the
rack connector.
4. Ensure there are no GDL alerts in the alert window. If there is an Alert
for software or configuration error or mismatch, reload the file noted
in the Alert.
5. Restart the PFD and MFD in configuration mode and go to the GDL
page. Verify unit is active. Verify the signal number is “2” or “3”. If it is
“0” or “1” check the GDL 69/69A antenna and cabling for faults.
Reseat the GDL 69/69A to verify the coax connector is fully seated.
6. If unit is not active, contact XM Customer service to have a refresh
signal sent to the unit. You will need to provide them the Audio
Radio ID (and Data Radio ID number for XM weather) numbers. Also
verify with XM that the correct Weather package (Aviator Lite or
Aviator) is on the account, and that no traffic service has been
activated against that Radio ID. The unit must be on for
approximately one hour after the request for the refresh has been
sent to receive the signal.
7. Alternatively, you may also go to XM’s website and enter the radio
ID’s to have a refresh signal sent. If there is still problems receiving
weather products after performing the above step, call XM and have
the account deactivated, and a new account activated to clear out
any corrupt account information.
8. Verify there is a good ground connection through the aircraft
between the MFD and the GDL69/69A unit. Reference the Bell Aircraft
Maintenance Manual for instructions on how to check bonding and
ground points. If problem persists, replace the GDL 69/69A.
9. For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the
MFD AUX - System Status Page for Data Link Receiver (GDL 69A)
status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has
been detected in the GDL 69A the status is marked with a red X.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-145

190-01737 Revision A
3.7.6 GMA 350H Audio Panel Troubleshooting

The following table lists common GMA Audio Panel faults and recommended actions to take.
Fault Recommended Action
Noise in Audio Most often the cause of the noise is external to the GMA 350H. Try
the following to locate the source of the noise before replacing the
audio panel:
x Try a different pair of headsets. Noise cancelling headsets may
pick up and/or generate more noise than standard headsets
from their own circuitry.
x Check for noise with engine turned off.
 If the noise is present only when the engine is running,
check the generator and/or ignition system as possible
sources of noise (see Bell Maintenance Manual).
x Check for noise as all electrical equipment is turned on and off
(strobes, other radios, etc.).
 If the noise is identified from one electrical system or
component refer to the Bell airframe maintenance manual.
x Make sure the NAV/COM squelch is not open.
x Make sure the ADF and DME audio is not active.
x Make sure the marker beacon audio is not active.
x Make sure the ICS squelch is not open. Master squelch level can
be adjusted on the GMA CONFIGURATION page for higher noise
environments.
x Check resistors in line with Music 1 and Music 2 wiring at the
GMA 350H in accordance with system wiring diagrams
x Make sure the Mic and Phone jacks are insulated from airframe
ground and that Music 1 and Music 2 jacks are not insulated
from airframe ground in console.
x Replace unit only after all possible external sources of noise are
eliminated.
Buttons Do Not Work x Some buttons are disabled in the GMA CONFIGURATION page
by default. This is to remove potential sources of audio noise
for inputs that are not used. If in doubt as to which buttons
should be disabled, reload GMA config files and other config
files for optional equipment installed in the aircraft (ADF, DME)
from the SD loader card.
COM Bleed Over x Make sure on the GMA CONFIGURATION page that “MUTE
AUDIO ON TX” has a green box. Due to the closeness of the
COM antennas and high power of the COM transmitters, COM
bleed-over may occur if this option is enabled. If the box is
black, highlight “MUTE AUDIO ON TX” with the cursor and press
the ENT key to turn the box green.
Speaker Cuts Out x Reduce the volume of the item that caused the speaker to cut
out when turned up. A speaker protection circuit disables the
speaker output if the volume is too high. If the volume is not
Page 3-146 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 Fault Recommended Action
sufficient, replace aircraft cabin speaker, reference the Bell
Maintenance Manual.
MIC Audio Heard in Speaker x Reduce ICS Volume.

3.7.6.1 GMA 350H 3D Audio Troubleshooting

Use the information that follows to troubleshoot 3D audio problems with the GMA 350H. Use the test
procedure in Section 6 to for general GMA 350(H) troubleshooting.

3.7.6.2 3D Audio (GMA 350H Only)

3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear, 3D
audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat
position. Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for
stereo intercom and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener
will still hear all audio sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation. With a single COM
selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock position. If both
COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position. All other
intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the GMA350
assumes the pilot sits in the left seat.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-147

190-01737 Revision A
3.7.6.3 Enabling 3D Audio
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions. When 3D
Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D audio right” in
the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear respectively, the
cause may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a headset or aircraft wiring
problem is suspected.

Symptom(s) Cause(s) Solution(s)

x “3D audio left” message x Mono headset in use x Use a stereo headset
heard in both ears. x Stereo headset in use with x Set mono/stereo switch on
mono/stereo switch set to headset to ‘stereo’
x “3D audio right” message ‘mono’ x If after checking solutions
not heard x Aircraft wiring has left audio #1 and #2 inspect/correct
wired to both left and right wiring. This wiring fault can
channels of stereo headset cause fail-safe audio not to
jack function.
“3D audio left” message heard x Mono headset in use x Use a stereo headset
in both ears, followed by “3D x Stereo headset in use with x Set mono/stereo switch on
audio right” message heard in mono/stereo switch set to headset to ‘stereo’
both ears mono x If after checking solutions
x Incorrect aircraft wiring #1 and #2 inspect/correct
(left/right shorted together) wiring. This wiring fault can
cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
“3D audio right” message heard Incorrect aircraft wiring (right Inspect/correct wiring. This
in both ears. “3D audio left” not channel used for mono instead wiring fault can cause fail-safe
heard of left or left/right swapped) audio not to function.
“3D audio left” message heard x Stereo headset is on x Verify correct orientation
in right ear only followed by “3D backwards from the left/right
audio right” message heard in x Incorrect aircraft wiring indication on each side of
left ear only (left/right channels the headset or the position
swapped) of the boom mic (usually
attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards
left/right position
information will be
swapped.
x Inspect/correct wiring. This
wiring fault can cause fail-
safe audio not to function.
“3D audio left” message heard Aircraft wired for mono Wire the installation for stereo
in left ear only, no audio heard intercom headsets.
in right ear.
“3D audio right” message heard Incorrect aircraft wiring (right Inspect/correct wiring. This
in right ear only, no audio heard channel used for mono instead wiring fault can cause fail-safe
in left ear of left, or left/right swapped) audio not to function.

Page 3-148 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7.7 GDU 1040H Troubleshooting
The following table lists common faults of the GDU 1040H and recommended actions to take.
Fault Recommended Action
Display will not track photocell
x Go to the GDU TEST page in configuration mode. Cover and
Keyboard will not track
uncover the photocells and verify that PHOTOCELL A or PHOTOCELL
photocell
B value changes.

x If values do not change, replace the display.

x Reload GDU configuration files.
Display will not track dimmer
x Reload PFD and MFD configuration files.
bus
Keyboard will not track dimmer x If display is a PFD, swap with a known good display to see if
bus problem remains with display.
x Replace display if condition remains with the same unit.
x If condition remains in original position after swapping displays,
*check GDU dimmer input to verify voltage is present.
x If display is the MFD, check dimmer input to verify voltage is
present.
x Replace MFD if dimmer voltage is present.

*NOTE: Unit connector pin 59. Disconnect the unit and check pin 59 in
the wire harness connector for a voltage.

Display is blank
x Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone technology is
not turned on (even in a monitoring state) in the cabin.
x Cycle power.
x If GDU recovers, observe display for yellow text containing error
information at the top of the screen. If message indicates software
need to be reloaded, then reload software. Otherwise, replace the
Display resets
GDU.
x Use a bright light to verify LCD is active.
x Adjust avionics dimmer control full clockwise.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-149

190-01737 Revision A
 Fault Recommended Action
Display flickers
x Manually turn up backlight on the PFD and load configuration files
to the GDU.
x Ensure slide lock is fully engaged with the locking tabs on the back
of the unit.
x If slide lock is not fully engaged, remove connector and verify the
locking tabs on the GDU are perpendicular to the connector. If
necessary, straighten them before reseating connector.
x Ensure GDU is receiving power. If a circuit breaker is tripped,
determine source of short before resetting breaker.
x Ensure circuit breakers have not failed and power wire connections
are secure.
x If problem does not follow unit, troubleshoot aircraft wiring for
fault.
x If problem is in the MFD, replace MFD.
SD card is stuck in GDU
x DO NOT insert a screwdriver of any length into the card slot.
x DO NOT pry against the overlay.
x DO NOT force the SD Card out.
x Use a small screwdriver in the groove on the side of the exposed end
of the card to help pull out the card.
x Push the card in further to release the card locking mechanism.
x Check SD Card for having more than one label. Two or more labels
on the card will cause sticking.
x Remove all but one label.
x Ensure the SD card is SanDisk. Use of other SD Cards is not
approved.
x If card was inserted with the label facing to the right, do not attempt
to remove it. Return the unit to Garmin for repair.
A button/knob/joystick does not
x Go to the GDU TEST page in configuration mode and verify button,
appear to function
knob, or joystick operates correctly by observing a change in color
from red to green in the button/knob/joystick icon when the
button/knob/joystick is pressed. If a button is stuck, the button icon
will be green without pressing the button as soon as you turn to the
GDU TEST page.

Page 3-150 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Fault Recommended Action

x If problem is verified, replace GDU.

Terrain/Obstacle/Safetaxi does
x Ensure supplemental data cards are inserted correctly in the lower
not display
slots of both GDU’s.
x Allow the system to verify the data on the cards for approximately
five minutes after power-up.
x If a database does not activate, reload the problem database onto
the SD Card or replace the card.
HTAWS FAIL
HTAWS system failure has x If message occurred on the first power
occurred. up after unlocking HTAWS, cycle
power to initialize HTAWS.
x Ensure each GDU contains a
supplemental data card.
x Ensure both GDUs are HTAWS
configured.
x If both GDUs are not HTAWS
configured, reconfigure.
x Verify GIA #1 is online.
x Ensure an Airport Terrain, Obstacle,
Terrain, Aviation Database, or GDU SW
mismatch has not occurred.
x If a mismatch has occurred, load
correct database/software files or
replace the terrain card.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-151

190-01737 Revision A
 HTAWS TEST HTAWS system is currently Normal annunciation during self test. Test
being tested. will take up to two minutes to complete.
HTAWS INHB HTAWS system alerting is Enable HTAWS system alerting by pressing
disabled the MENU button from the MAP – HTAWS
page.
HTAWS N/A GPS system integrity not Ensure valid GPS position is received from
high enough to enable the AUX – GPS STATUS page.
HTAWS

3.7.8 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) Troubleshooting

Figure 3-x. Synthetic Vision Imagery

The Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on
the PFD. SVT™ imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as
well as the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data,
the PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display. If SVT becomes disabled,
troubleshoot the following possible faults:
x Loss of Attitude data
x Loss of Heading data
x Loss of GPS position data
x Loss of 6 Arc-second Terrain data
x Loss of Obstacle data

Page 3-152 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 x HTAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
x The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.

3.7.9 Garmin Connext Weather Data Troubleshooting

The optional GSR 56 Iridium satellite data link receiver provides extensive weather information to the
G1000H. The system displays graphical weather information and its associated text on the Multi Function
Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The system provides weather information after the flight crew selects either a manual or automatic
Connext Data Request on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page on the MFD. Garmin Connext Weather
requires an active subscription to both Iridium and Garmin Connext services.
If the G1000H cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the request
status window (see following table).

Weather Request Description and Recommended Actions

Status Message

Auto requests The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive
inhibited errors. Automatic weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather
Send manual data request to resume automatic updates.
request to reset.

Auto update retry: The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error
## Seconds occurred during the previous request. Timer counts down until the next
automatic request occurs.

Connext Comm A communications error has occurred with the GDL 59H or GIA. Troubleshoot the
Error [2] GDL 59H and the GIA 63H.

Connext Comm This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or
Error [4] the GDL 59H or a GIA is off-line. Check the system status page to see if the GIA
and/or GDL 59 is online indicated by a green checkmark. If not, reconfigure the
GDL 59H and/or reconfigure the GIA.

Connext Comm This can occur if the GDL 59H is off-line or not configured, or the Iridium or
Error [5] Connext systems are not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength. Reconfigure
the GDL 59H.

Connext Comm A communications error has occurred. Check connections and wiring for faults.
Error [6] Check for latest software versions.

Connext Comm A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send
Error [7] the data request.

Connext Comm A server error has occurred or invalid data received.

Error [8]

Connext Login There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact Garmin at 1-
Invalid 866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135 for assistance.

Connext Server The Garmin Connext ground-based weather data server is temporarily out of
Temporarily Inop service, but is expected to return to service in less than 30 minutes.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-153

190-01737 Revision A
Connext Server The Garmin Connext weather data server will be out of service for at least 30
Inop minutes.

Invalid Coverage The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the
Area following: a waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least
one of the coverage options is enabled (checked) and contains required criteria,
then re-send the data request.

No Connext The system is not be currently subscribed to the Garmin Connext Weather service,
Subscription or the access code is incorrect. Verify the access code. Contact at 1-866-739-5687
in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135 for assistance.

Reduce Request The Connext Data Request area exceeds size limits. Reduce weather coverage
Area area and re-send data request.

Request Cancelled The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.

Requested area The size of the Connext Data Request has exceeded limits. Reduce the size of the
too large. Reduce coverage area and try the weather data request again.
coverage area.

Request Failed - The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Try Again

Transfer The GDL 59H is busy. Retry request later.

Preempted

NOTE: The G1000H also displays message advisories on the PFD which may indicate a problem with the
GDL 59H.

3.7.10 Stormscope® Troubleshooting

For complete troubleshooting information refer to the L-3 Communications Avionics Systems WX-500
Installation Manual which contains installation instructions and recommended flight line maintenance
information for the WX-500 Stormscope® (P/N 009-11500-001).

3.7.11 Maintenance Logs

The Maintenance Log feature records maintenance data specified by Bell. This data is copied to an SD
Card, or transmitted via Wi-Fi or Iridium telephone. Refer to Bell maintenance documentation for details
on maintenance logs.

Page 3-154 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
3.7.12 Assert Logs
If additional assistance is needed in troubleshooting LRU faults, assert logs for selected LRUs can be
downloaded to an SD card as encrypted files and emailed to Garmin Aviation Product Support for
evaluation. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support before sending a log to prevent any delay in
response.
NOTE
The following procedure requires the aircraft to be on the ground.
Downloading system Assert Logs:
1. Place an SD card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Start the system in configuration mode.
3. Select the System Status Page.
4. Enable the cursor and select the desired LRU from the LRU list, and press the ENT key.

5. Press the ‘DNLD LOG’ softkey:

6. Monitor the Assert Log Download Box:

7. Press the ENT key when the box shows 100%:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 3-155

190-01737 Revision A
 8. Repeat for any additional LRUs which require data.
9. Power down the system and remove the SD card.
10. Insert the assert log as an attachment to an email and include the LRU download order. Send to
Garmin Aviation Product Support at [email protected].

3.8 LRU EXTERNAL CONNECTOR INFORMATION

LRU external connector information may aid in troubleshooting. Appendix A contains connector pin
numbers and names.

Page 3-156 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
SECTION 4—LRU REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
This section contains basic procedures for removing and installing G1000H LRUs. This section is not a
substitute for an approved Bell maintenance manual, installation design drawing, or complete installation
data package.
NOTE
Once an LRU is replaced, software loading and testing may be required. See Section 5 for
software loading and Section 6 for testing procedures.
Always ensure that helicopter power is off when removing and/or replacing an LRU. Disconnect any auxiliary
power supplies. Before performing maintenance, the technician needs to verify that LRU software part
numbers and version numbers match the software configuration listed in the general arrangement drawing.
The System Status Page on the MFD can also be used to check serial numbers and versions:

Figure 4-1. AUX-System Status Page

The System Status Page displays the status, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. The system displays a green check for each active LRUs. A red ‘X’ indicates an LRU is not
present (configured).

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
 NOTE
Certain LRU connectors include Garmin backshell assemblies. Garmin’s backshell gives the
installer the ability to easily terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing. Refer to the
Jackscrew Backshell Installation Instructions (Garmin P/N 190-00313-11) for backshell
assembly instructions.
4.1 GDC 74H AIR DATA COMPUTER
Due to the various installation options and configurations available for the GDC 74H, refer to the GDC
74(X) Installation Manual, P/N 190-00303-15 for replacement procedures.
4.2 GDL 59H DATA LINK
Refer to the GDL 59 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00837-00 for replacement procedures.
4.3 GDL 69AH SATELLITE DATA LINK RECEIVER
NOTE
Two installation configurations are available for the G1000H, modular rack or remote mount.
The Bell 407GX uses the modular rack. Insert the GDL 69AH into the rack, noting proper
orientation. The following steps are for the remote mounting rack which is illustrated in Figure
2-2. The steps are identical for the modular rack.
To install:

CAUTION

Do not use excessive force when inserting the GDL 69AH into the rack. This could damage the
connectors, unit, and/or unit rack. If heavy resistance is felt during installation, STOP! Remove
the GDL unit and identify the source of resistance. The unit is designed with a key and the
back plate is designed to float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plate is not bound by
the connector harness.

1. Loosen and remove the Locking Lever Handle Securing Screw (4). Then, lift up on the end of the
Locking Lever Handle (1).
2. Slide the GDL 69AH unit into the Mount Rack carefully fitting the Locking Lever Handle Cam Head (2)
into the slot of the Locking Plate (3) of the Mount Rack.
3. After fully inserting the unit into the mount rack, visually note that the Cam Head (2) remains seated
in the slot of the Locking Plate (3).
4. With the unit firmly engaged with the mount rack, lower the Locking Lever Handle (1). Then, insert
and tighten the Locking Lever Handle Securing Screw (4) to mechanically secure the unit to the Mount
Rack.

Page 4-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 4-2. GDL 69AH Installation (Remote Mount Shown)

To remove:
To remove the GDL 69AH, reverse the installation steps.
4.4 GDU 1040H MFD AND PFD

The display is mounted flush to the aircraft instrument panel using four captive screws.
To remove:
1. Loosen each of the four captive screws using a 3/32” hex drive tool
2. Disconnect backshell assembly from unit and remove the GDU.
To install:
1. Inspect connector(s) for damaged pins.
2. Connect backshell assembly to unit.
3. Hold unit flush with the instrument panel.
4. The GDU 1040H uses captive screws and do not have alignment marks. A 3/32” hex drive tool is used
to turn each of the four captive screws clockwise until tight (not exceeding 20 +/-2 in-lbs).

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
4.5 GEA 71H ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT
To install:
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GEA 71H into the rack. This may cause damage
to occur to the connectors, unit, and/or unit rack. If heavy resistance is felt during installation,
stop! Remove the GEA 71H and identify the source of resistance. The rear plate is designed to
float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plate is not bound by the connector harness.
1. Inspect connector(s) for damaged pins.
2. Gently push unit into the rack to engage the connectors.
3. Lock the GEA 71H in place using the install screw. Tighten the screw until the connectors are fully
mated and the retaining wedge in the rack is fully mated with the wedge attached to the unit.
Torque the install screw to 15 +/- 2 in-lbs.
To remove:
Reverse the installation steps.

4.5.1 GEA 71H Backshell Thermocouple

The GEA 71H has a K-Type thermocouple (Item 1 shown below) installed in its backshell, in addition to the
configuration module. The thermocouple is used in conjunction with the configuration module temperature
sensor to compensate for temperature probe errors resulting from the dissimilar metals at the pin contacts.

Figure 4-3. GEA 71H Backshell Thermocouple

Page 4-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Thermocouple Kit (011-00981-00)

To remove:
1. Remove GEA 71H per Section 6.4.
2. Remove GEA connector backplate.
3. Remove connector assembly J711 from the backplate.
4. Remove screws, item 7, and cover, item 6, from the backshell, item 5.
5. Unscrew thermocouple from boss on backshell. Extract the thermocouple pins from the connector.

To install:
1. Crimp pins, item 2, onto each of the thermocouple wires, item 1. Ensure that pre-stripped wire length
is 1/8” prior to crimping.
2. Insert newly crimped pins and wires into the appropriate connector housing location, item 4, as
specified by Bell Wiring Diagram, listed in table above.
3. Place thermocouple body, item 1, onto the backshell boss, item 5. Place the thermocouple as shown
in Figure 4-3 so that the wires exit towards the bottom of the backshell.
4. Fasten thermocouple tightly to backshell using the provided screw, item 3.
5. Fasten cover, item 6, to backshell using screws, item 7.
6. Continue to Section 6 and test the GEA 71H.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-5

190-01737-00 Revision A
4.6 GIA 63H INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT (Helicopter Rack)

Figure 4-4. GIA 63H Rear Connector Identification

Page 4-6 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 4-5. GIA 63H Installation

To Install:
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GIA 63H into the rack. This may cause damage
to the connectors, unit and/or unit rack. If excessive resistance is felt during installation, stop!
Remove the GIA 63H and identify the source of resistance. The rear plates are designed to
float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plates are not bound by the connectors or
spring clip.

NOTE
The install screw is designed with a ratcheting socket that resists turning counterclockwise,
unless pushed in. This ensures that the engagement screw cannot loosen under vibration.

1. Carefully place the GIA 63H onto the rack, making sure that the mounting hardware on the bottom of
the unit closest to the connectors clears the first set of spring pins on the rack.
2. Once the unit is placed on the rack, slide the unit into the rack until the install screw makes contact.
The unit can only be installed in one direction.
3. Using a Hex Driver, tighten the unit into the rack via the install screw. Tighten the screw to the torque
specified in Figure 4-4.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-7

190-01737-00 Revision A
To remove:
To remove the GIA 63H, reverse the installation steps.

4.7 GMA 350H AUDIO PANEL

CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GMA 350H into the rack. This may damage the
connectors, unit, and/or unit rack. If heavy resistance is felt during installation, stop! Remove
the GMA 350H and identify the source of resistance.

Figure 4-6. GMA 350H Installation

Page 4-8 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
To install:

1. Insert the GMA 350H into the rack, noting proper orientation as shown on the installation drawing in
Figure 4-6.
2. Lock the GMA 350/350H in place using the appropriate size hex wrench.

To remove:
Reverse the installation steps to remove the GMA 350H.

4.8 GRS 77 AHRS AND GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER

Refer to the Garmin GRS 77/GMU 44 Installation Manual P/N 190-00303-10 for instructions on removing and
installing the GRS 77 and GMU 44.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-9

190-01737-00 Revision A
4.9 GSR 56H IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
To remove:
1. Turn the ratchet mechanism located at the front of the unit counter clockwise until it drops free of the
locking pawl on the unit.
2. Slide the unit out of the rack.
To install:
1. Inspect the rack connectors for damaged pins before installing the new unit.
2. Gently push the unit into the rack engaging the connectors.
3. Lift the ratchet mechanism to allow the collar to engage the locking pawl on the unit and turn it
clockwise.
4. If ratchet mechanism does not turn with moderate force, stop and make sure the unit is aligned in the
rack and there is no blockage (i.e. FOD in the rack).
5. The GSR 56H does not require software or configuration loading if replaced. Instead, Garmin and/or
Iridium need to be contacted to establish service with the new unit.

Figure 4-7. GSR 56H Installation Drawing

Page 4-10 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 4-8. GSR 56H Rear Connector Identification

4.10 GTP 59 OAT PROBE

For GTP 59 installation and removal instructions, refer to ‘GTP 59–GDC 74(X)/GDC 7400 Interconnect Harness
Fabrication Instructions’ P/N 190-00313-00. This document is available on the dealer portion of the Garmin
website.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-11

190-01737-00 Revision A
4.11 GTS 800 TAS

CAUTION
After any maintenance or modification is made to the GTS 800 TAS cables such as replacing a
connector or entire cable, be sure to adhere to all of the specifications and limitations such as
minimum and maximum cable attenuation, attenuation balance between cables, phase
matching etc.

The GTS 800 TAS uses the Garmin Vertical Helicopter Rack, P/N 011-02420-00.
To remove:
1. If a cooling hose is attached to the unit, remove it from the air fitting and set aside.
2. Turn the harness connector jackscrews counterclockwise to disengage them from the unit.
3. Pull the harness connectors away from the unit.
4. Disengage the QMA coax connectors by pulling back firmly on the outer sleeve of the QMA plug away
from the jack connector. This will disengage the locking mechanism that secures the plug connector
to the jack connector. Pulling on or disengaging the QMA connectors in any other way is not
recommended and may cause damage to both the connectors and coaxial cable.

5. Loosen the unit hold down clamp by turning it counterclockwise until it disengages the unit hold
down tab.
6. Pull the unit up slightly at an angle and pull the unit out of the rack from the connector end of the
unit.

To install:
1. Hold the unit at a slight angle with the connector end up and slide the back of the unit into the rack
engaging the curled up lip at the back of the rack.
2. Fully seat the unit the rest of the way into the rack.
3. Pull the locking clamp up and turn it clockwise to engage the unit hold down tab tightly.
4. Attach the QMA coax connectors by holding the outer sleeve of the QMA plug to align the connectors
and insert the plug onto the jack until it snaps into place. There will be an audible “snap” when the
connectors are fully engaged. No tools are required for the insertion of a QMA plug onto a QMA jack. It
is critical to assure the QMA connectors are fully inserted to prevent a GTS Self Test Failure.

Page 4-12 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 5. Install the harness connectors and tighten the connector jackscrews to secure the connectors.

6. If a cooling hose was attached to the unit, reinstall the cooling hose to the air fitting.
4.12 GTX 33H w/ES TRANSPONDER
To install:

Figure 4-9. GTX 33H Modular Rack

CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GTX 33H into the rack (Figure 4-8). This may
cause damage to occur to the connectors, unit, and/or unit rack. If heavy resistance is felt
during installation, stop! Remove the GTX 33H and identify the source of resistance. The rear
plate is designed to float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plate is not bound by the
connector harness.

1. Insert the GTX 33H into the rack, noting proper orientation as shown on the installation drawing in
Figure 4-9 .
CAUTION
Start the handle screw into the hole carefully, to avoid cross-threading. Do not apply torque in
excess of 14 in-lbs to the handle screw. The application of torque exceeding 14 in-lbs to this
screw will damage the LRU case and/or retaining hardware.

2. Lock the GTX 33H in place using the lever-locking handle. Fasten the handle to the GTX 33H
body using the provided Phillips screw.
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-13
190-01737-00 Revision A
 Figure 4-10. GTX 33H Rack Orientation

To remove:
To remove the GTX 33H, reverse the installation steps.

Page 4-14 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
4.13 CONFIGURATION MODULE

Configuration modules (Item 1 shown below) are located in the following LRU harness connector backshells
(Item 6): GDU 1040H PFD, GRS 77H AHRS and the GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Unit.

Figure 4-11. Configuration Module

Configuration Module Kit – 011-00979-00 or -03

To remove:
1. Disconnect connector from the LRU.
2. Remove 2 screws (8) from cover (7) and remove cover.
3. Unplug connector from configuration module (1).
4. Remove configuration module.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-15

190-01737-00 Revision A
To install:
1. Inspect connector for damaged pins (4).
2. Place configuration module (1) in position.
3. Insert connector into configuration module (1).
4. Assembly of the connector is the reverse of disassembly.
5. Continue to Section 6.16.1.
4.13.1 Configuration Module Checkout
If a GRS 77 AHRS Configuration Module is replaced:
All three GRS 77/GMU 44 calibration procedures must be performed. Proceed to Section 6.
If a GEA 71H Configuration Module is replaced:
Proceed to the GEA 71H testing section in Section 6.
If only the Master Configuration Module is replaced:
NOTE
New Terrain/Obstacle cards, Jeppesen Aviation Database and other optional features (i.e.
TAWS unlock card) will need to be replaced if the master configuration module is changed.
The G1000H System ID number will change to a new number when installing a new master
config module. The old Terrain and other cards will no longer work as they will remain locked
to the old System ID number.
1. Start the G1000H in configuration mode.
2. Go to the Configuration Upload Page on the PFD.
3. Press the UPDT CFG softkey and press ENT.
If both the PFD and the Master Configuration Module are replaced:
NOTE
New Terrain/Obstacle cards, Jeppesen Aviation Database and other optional features (i.e.
TAWS unlock card) will need to be replaced if the master configuration module is changed.
The G1000H System ID number will change to a new number when installing a new master
config module. The old Terrain and other cards will no longer work as they will remain locked
to the old System ID number.
The entire G1000H must be re-configured. See Section 8.

Page 4-16 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
4.14 GSC 46 SIGNAL CONDITIONER
To remove:
1. Disconnect the power and data cable from the unit.
2. Remove the four screws attaching the unit to the mounting tray.
3. Remove the unit.
To install:
1. Attach the unit to the mounting tray with four screws.
2. Connect the power and data cable to the unit.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 4-17

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Blank Page

Page 4-18 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
SECTION 5— LOADING LRU SOFTWARE

This section describes how to load software to an individual LRU based on the following scenarios:
• Reinstalling an Original LRU (same serial number)
• Installing a LRU in Opposite Locations for Troubleshooting Purposes
• Installing a New, Repaired, or Exchanged LRU
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE POWER FROM THE SYSTEM WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. Do not rely on
only the aircraft batteries during a software load. Connect a ground power unit. Power loss
during installation may cause a LRU to become corrupted and unresponsive requiring
replacement. Replacing corrupted units are not covered under warranty.

5.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1. Software Loader Card — The software loader card must have the correct software version before
installing any files into the system. Installing the files from a previous software version loader card
will prevent the system from operating correctly. Verify that the software part number on the MFD
AUX – SYSTEM STATUS page matches the software part number listed in the ‘ldr_part_nmbr.txt’ file
on the loader card.
2. Displays — Place both displays in the same mode (configuration or normal) for installing software
unless instructed differently. The software load may not be successful if the displays are not in the
same mode.
3. Supplemental Database Cards — Remove supplemental database cards from the lower slot of the
displays before installing software into any LRU. Not removing the cards may corrupt them during a
software upload. Replacing corrupted database cards are not covered under warranty.
4. SanDisk SD™ Cards — Use SanDisk SD™ cards for installing software and configuration files. The use of
other card brands is not approved.
5. Optional Equipment — Determine what optional equipment is installed in the aircraft before
installing software. Optional equipment configuration files will need to be reinstalled after an LRU
replacement to activate them. Failure to install configuration files for optional equipment will
prevent them from working properly.
6. Optional Features — Determine what optional features are installed before installing the AIRFRAME
configuration file. If the AIRFRAME configuration file is loaded from the system software card, you will
need to enable the optional features using their enable cards. Failure to load configuration files for
optional features will prevent them from working.
7. Using the ENT Key — Pressing the ENT key will check and uncheck the highlighted configuration box.
8. Testing — perform testing after software is loaded to an LRU and before returning it to service
according to the procedures in Section 6.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
5.2 CROSSFILL MONITORING SYSTEM
After a configuration file upload to an MFD or PFD is complete, it has only been verified on the PFD, and not on
any other device. If the technician powers down the devices before the configuration has been sent to the
other devices on the crossfill network, it is possible that the other devices may not have received the entire
configuration. When these devices are powered on with missing or invalid configuration, they may revert to a
default, safe configuration, and then that new configuration will be crossfilled to the other devices (including
the original device that has the correct configuration), erasing the uploaded configuration. The Crossfill
Monitoring System prevents that from happening by waiting until crossfill has completed to declare the
upload complete, at which point it is safe to power down the devices.
While the Crossfill Monitor is waiting for crossfill to complete, a progress bar displays the percentage of the
10-minute timeout that has elapsed. This bar does not display the crossfill progress. When crossfill is
complete, the bar will be set to 100%, the Crossfill Monitor will display a message to the technician that the
upload is complete, and the OK button will appear, concluding the upload process.

The Crossfill Monitor immediately fails if it detects that a configured LRU (PFD, MFD, or GTC) is not online. This
is because an offline device could cause the problem the monitoring system was meant to prevent if it did not
receive the configuration, or if it received only partial configuration.

In this case, the summary window displays the configured LRU or LRUs that it detects as being offline:

The Crossfill Monitor waits indefinitely for crossfill to complete, but after 10 minutes it displays a message
advising the technician that something may be wrong.

Page 5-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Timed Out, But Still Watching
The wait has been at least 10 minutes and crossfill still has not completed:

User Cancels After Timeout

The Summary window on the System upload page will report what LRUs it still detected as unsynced at the
time the user cancelled. Normally PFD1 would not detect as unsynced, because the device which is uploading
is always considered to be synced with itself.

The listed LRUs would be the ones to check for the problems mentioned in the troubleshooting section. The
crossfill will still be ongoing even after the user cancels, though it will no longer be monitored.

Crossfill Completes After Timeout

Even though 'timeout' has occurred, crossfill still proceeds normally, and if the Crossfill Monitor detects that
the network has synced all of the 'config' tags, then it will still show a completion message, even after
timeout. This message will only be displayed if the user has not yet cancelled. Crossfill will still be ongoing
even after the user cancels, though it will no longer be monitored.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
 NOTE
If the timeout has elapsed, an error has occurred and crossfill is not going to finish. The
technician should cancel, view the unsynced LRUs, and proceed with troubleshooting (unless
the decision is made to let it run as part of troubleshooting).
Crossfill Troubleshooting
Failure
Possible causes for this include the following:
x An LRU is not online or is not connected to the uploading LRU.
x An LRU is configured and should not be.
Possible Corrections:
x Turn on the offline device.
x Check the LRUs configured and see if one is configured and should not be so.
Timeout
Possible causes for this include the following:
x A connected device is not in config mode (either because it was never in config mode, or because it
did not restart in config mode after a software upload).
x Something else is preventing registry tags from appropriately crossfilling to at least 1 other device.
x Not all LRUs have the same software version.
Possible Corrections:
x Ensure that all configured LRUs are on, and in config mode.
x Ensure that all online LRUs can be seen by the uploading device on the network (The System Status
page on the uploading device should show which ones it detects on the network.)
x Ensure that all LRUs have the same software version.
Timeout Problem Persists
x Pay special attention to the LRUs listed as being unsynced when the user cancels the monitoring
process (see ‘User cancels after timeout’ above).
x If after several attempts, the same LRU or LRUs are listed as being unsynced, it is likely that there is
something preventing those devices from crossfilling. Double-check that they are in config mode, and
have the same software version as the other LRUs.
x If after several attempts, different/random LRUs are listed as being unsynced, it is likely that there is a
registry tag that is changing too fast to ever be detected as 'synced'. For the technician, this means it
is likely that crossfill has truly completed, and there is just one or a small number of tags that are
changing quickly.
x The Crossfill Monitoring system is advisory (it doesn't perform crossfilling, it monitors) and crossfilling
proceeds normally, so waiting 10 minutes (which is the crossfill timeout time) still applies.

Page 5-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.3 CLEARING USER SETTINGS
All user data must be cleared after a GDU system software update and configuration load is performed. The
following procedures describe how to clear user settings for the G1000H.
NOTE
Clearing user settings will remove user data including user waypoints, pilot selections, and
stored flight plans. If desired, stored flight plans (not user waypoints or pilot selections) can
be saved to an SD card. Refer to the Bell 407GX Pilot’s Guide for instructions.
Following a system software update and configuration load (see figure below) per applicable instructions,
wait at least 10 minutes to ensure completion of the crossfill function before turning the system off, then
proceed with the following steps.

NOTE

The 10 minute waiting period is only required for system software versions 13.XX and all prior
versions.

1. Remove power from the PFD.

2. Repeat for the MFD.
3. While holding the CLR button on the PFD, reset the circuit breaker.
4. Repeat for the MFD.
5. When prompted to clear user settings (see figures below), press the YES softkey on each GDU .

6. The ‘User Settings Cleared’ message will be displayed (see figure below) on each GDU to verify that all
user data has been cleared.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-5

190-01737-00 Revision A
5.4 LRU SOFTWARE LOADING PROCEDURES
5.4.1 GDU 1040H Displays
Original Display Reinstalled
If the removed display(s) are reinstalled in their original positions, no software or configuration file loading is
required. This does not include displays that were returned for repair since their software and configuration
files were deleted.
Original Displays Installed in Opposite Locations for Troubleshooting
If the PFD and MFD are installed in opposite locations for troubleshooting, no software or configuration file
installation is required. NOTE: Some button/knob functions may not work correctly until the displays are
reinstalled in their original location. Return the displays to their original location after troubleshooting.
New, Repaired or Exchanged Display(s) Installed
Load software and configuration files from the software loader card if a new, repaired, or exchanged GDU is
installed. Navigation database loading must also be performed. See Section 8 for instructions. Retain the
Supplemental Database and other SD cards from the original display to reinstall in the new display after
loading software.
NOTE
If replacing the PFD with a new, repaired, or exchanged GDU, the new GDU must be placed in
the MFD location and the GDU system files loaded there to prevent calibration and other
configuration data residing in the PFD config module from being deleted. It is not necessary
to install a display in the PFD position to load GDU software into a display installed in the MFD
position. After loading GDU software into the display in the MFD position, turn off the system
and move the GDU to the PFD position in the instrument panel and continue the install by
loading the configuration files.
NOTE
If the airframe file is reloaded for troubleshooting, or when replacing the PFD or MFD, all LRU
configuration files and options must be reloaded. All features also must enabled again using
the appropriate enable cards.

Displays with GDU Backup Cap Test Software Installed

If a GDU has had the GDU Backup Cap Test Software (006-B0380-15) installed, the correct software files must
be installed to return the GDU to the correct configuration. Reloading the navigation database files are not
necessary.

Page 5-6 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
GDU Software Files
1. Remove the supplemental database card from the bottom slot of each GDU.
2. Insert the system software loader card into top slot of unit being replaced.
3. Power on the MFD and PFD in configuration mode.
4. Press the ENT key at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
5. Confirm update completion.
6. Confirm correct software part number and software version on the SYSTEM STATUS page.
7. Power off the MFD and PFD.
8. Power on the MFD and PFD in normal mode.
9. Power off the MFD and PFD.
10. Reinstall the supplemental database card in the bottom slot of each GDU.
GDU Configuration Files
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Power the PFD and the MFD on in configuration mode.
3. Press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. Select the System Upload Page on the PFD.
5. Activate the cursor and highlight the appropriate aircraft in the GROUP field.
6. Press the ENT key.
7. Highlight the appropriate aircraft base configuration file in the ITEM field. Turn the small FMS
knob to select the file. Press the ENT key. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and
config files.
8. Press the CLR ALL softkey. All boxes empty.
9. In the PRODUCT window select the correct configuration files for a PFD and/or MFD.
10. Press the LOAD softkey.
11. View the SUMMARY field and ensure that the load is complete.
12. Load configuration files for optional equipment. These must be loaded in order for the optional
equipment to function correctly.
13. If optional equipment was reloaded then once all optional equipment is loaded press the ‘UPDT
CFG’ button on the lower right corner of the screen.
14. If the airframe configuration file was loaded earlier, use the optional feature enable cards to
enable optional features. These cards should be with the aircraft.
15. Load the navigation database (Section 8).

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-7

190-01737-00 Revision A
 16. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each
display. Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
17. Reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display. Be sure to insert the
card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
GDU 1040H MFD/PFD Testing
Perform testing described in Section 6.1.

Page 5-8 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.4.2 GIA 63H INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT
Original GIA 63H(s) Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the removed GIA is reinstalled in its original position (GIA1
and GIA2 in their original racks). This does not include units that were returned for repair since their software
and configuration files were deleted during repair.
Original GIA 63H(s) Installed in Opposite Locations for Troubleshooting
No software loading is required if the original GIA units are installed in opposite locations (GIA1 and GIA2 in
opposite unit racks) for troubleshooting. However, the GIAs must be reconfigured.
1. Remove the GIA 63H units and install them in opposite locations (i.e. GIA1 into the GIA2 slot and vice
versa) with the system turned off.
2. Apply system power and place displays in configuration mode.
3. Select the GIA RS-232/ARNIC 429 CONFIG page on the PFD.
4. Verify GIA1 is listed in the SELECT UNIT box in the upper left corner of the screen.
5. Press the SET>ACTV softkey in the lower left corner of the screen.
6. Verify ‘OK’ is highlighted and press the ENT key when the ‘Activate parameter settings?’ window
appears.
7. When the ‘GIA #1 Configured’ window shows ‘Complete’, activate the cursor, turn the small FMS knob
to show the list of GIA choices, highlight GIA2 in the pop-up box and press the ENT key.
8. Press the SET>ACTV softkey in the lower left corner of the screen.
9. When the ‘Activate parameter settings?’ window appears, verify OK is highlighted and press the ENT
key.
10. When the ‘GIA #2 Configured’ window shows ‘Complete’, press the ENT key to select OK in the
window.
11. Turn off the system.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GIA 63H(s) Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchanged GIA 63H is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded.
1. Remove the supplemental database cards from the bottom slots of each display. Note which card
was removed from the MFD so it may be identified later for reinsertion in the MFD when software and
configuration loading is complete. It contains a FliteChart or ChartView database that is only used by
the MFD.
2. Insert the correct airframe software loader card into top slot of the PFD.
3. Apply system power and place both displays in configuration mode.
4. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
5. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob to turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
6. Activate the cursor and highlight the appropriate aircraft in the GROUP field.
7. Press the ENT key.
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-9
190-01737-00 Revision A
 8. Highlight the appropriate aircraft base configuration file in the ITEM field. Turn the small FMS knob to
select the file. Press the ENT key. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and config files.
9. Press the CLR ALL softkey. All boxes empty.
10. Select the correct software and configuration files. Press the LOAD softkey.
11. When the upload is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
12. Verify that each column indicates with a green check when the loading process has finished and
observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful.
13. Load additional configuration files for optional equipment installed in the aircraft.
14. After the software and configuration files are loaded, turn off the system and reinsert the
supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display. Be sure to insert the card removed
from the MFD back into the MFD.
GIA 63H Testing
Perform testing described in Section 6.2.

Page 5-10 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.4.3 GMA 350H Audio Panel
Original GMA 350H Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the original GMA Audio Panel is reinstalled. This does not
include units that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during
repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GMA 350H Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchanged GMA 350H is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit.
Restoring GMA 350H Functionality
If the ‘No GMA 350H Option’ is used to remove GMA 350H functionality, the correct software and configuration
files must be loaded to the unit in order to restore GMA 350H operation.
NOTE
Before loading configuration files the technician needs to go to the GMA Marker Beacon
Configuration Page and copy down the marker beacon sensitivity HI and LO settings figure
below). After loading the configuration files, you will need to restore the original HI and LO
settings if they are different.

1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-11

190-01737-00 Revision A
 6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Press the ENT key. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor):

8. Turn the small FMS knob. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in its own window.
9. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

Page 5-12 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
11. Select all of the files (both software and configuration) relating to the GMA 350H as shown in the
PRODUCT window below:

NOTE
In addition to the baseline software and configuration files that must be loaded, any GMA
350H files for optional equipment installed on the helicopter must also be loaded:

If desired:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-13

190-01737-00 Revision A
 12. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
13. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
14. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

15. Deactivate the cursor. Press the ‘UPDT CFG softkey:

16. Cycle power and reboot the system. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database
cards in the bottom slot of each display. Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into
the MFD.

GMA 350H Testing

Perform testing described in Section 6.3.

Page 5-14 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.4.4 GRS 77H AHRS and GMU 44 Magnetometer
5.4.4.1 GRS 77H
Original GRS 77 is Reinstalled
No GRS 77H software or configuration files need to be loaded if the original GRS 77H is reinstalled. This does
not include units that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were removed
during repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GRS 77H is Installed
If a new, repaired, or exchanged GRS 77H is installed the correct software files must be loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Press the ENT key. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor):

8. Turn the small FMS knob. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in its own window.
9. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-15

190-01737-00 Revision A
 10. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
11. Select the following software file relating to the GRS 77H as shown in the PRODUCT window below:

12. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
13. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
14. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

Page 5-16 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 15. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
New GRS 77H Configuration Module is Installed
If the GRS 77H configuration module is replaced, no software loading is required. However, the GRS 77H
Pitch/Roll Offset and GMU44 Magnetometer Calibration Procedures need to be performed (Section 6).
5.4.4.2 GMU 44
Original GMU 44 is Reinstalled
If the original GMU 44 is reinstalled, no software loading is required. This does not include units that were
returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GMU 44 is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchanged GMU 44 is installed the correct software files must be loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Press the ENT key. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor):

8. Turn the small FMS knob. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in its own window.
9. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-17

190-01737-00 Revision A
 10. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
11. Select the following software file relating to the GMU 44 as shown in the PRODUCT window below:

12. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
13. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
14. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

Page 5-18 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 15. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
GRS/GMU Calibration Procedure
Perform the calibration procedure described in Section 6.10.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-19

190-01737-00 Revision A
5.4.5 GDC 74H Air Data Computer
NOTE
Any pitot/static covers must be removed in order to successfully execute the software and/or
configuration loading to the GDC 74H.
Original GDC 74H is Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the original GDC 74H is reinstalled. This does not include
units that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GDC 74H is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchanged GDC 74H is installed the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Press the ENT key. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor):

8. Turn the small FMS knob. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in its own window.
9. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

Page 5-20 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
11. Select the following software file relating to the GDC 74H as shown in the PRODUCT window below:

12. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
13. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
14. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-21

190-01737-00 Revision A
 15. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

New GDC 74H Configuration Module is Installed

If the GDC 74H configuration module has been replaced the correct configuration files must be loaded.

GDC 74H Testing

Perform testing described in Section 6.4.

Page 5-22 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.4.6 GEA 71H Engine/Airframe Interface Unit
Original GEA 71H Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the original GEA 71 is reinstalled. This does not include
units that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GEA 71H Installed
If a new, repaired or exchanged GEA 71H is installed the correct software, configuration, and optional
equipment files must be loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Press the ENT key. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor):

8. Turn the small FMS knob. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in its own window.
9. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-23

190-01737-00 Revision A
 10. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
11. Select the following software file relating to the GEA 71H as shown in the PRODUCT window below:

12. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
13. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
14. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

Page 5-24 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 15. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

GEA 71H Testing

Perform testing described in Section 6.5.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-25

190-01737-00 Revision A
5.4.7 GTX 33H TRANSPONDER
Original GTX 33H Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the original GTX 33H is reinstalled. This does not include
units that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during repair.
New or Repaired GTX 33H is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchanged GTX is installed, the correct software and configuration files must be loaded
to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Press the ENT key. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor):

8. Turn the small FMS knob. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed in its own window.
9. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

Page 5-26 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
11. Select all of the files (software and configuration) relating to the GTX 33H in the PRODUCT window.

12. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
13. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
14. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-27

190-01737-00 Revision A
 15. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
GTX 33H Testing
Perform testing described in Section 6.6.

Page 5-28 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.4.8 GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver (Optional Equipment)
Original GSR 56H Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the original unit is reinstalled. This does not include units
that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GSR 56H is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchanged GSR 56H is installed the configuration files must be loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Options’.

8. Press the ENT key. The first optional item is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor).
9. Turn the small FMS knob. A window is displayed showing all of the available options:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-29

190-01737-00 Revision A
 10. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Bell-GSR 56’:

11. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the configuration files:

Page 5-30 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 12. Press the ‘CLR ALL’ softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
13. Press the ‘CHK GFG’ softkey.
14. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
15. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
16. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

17. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.
GSR 56H Testing
Perform testing described in Section 6.8.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-31

190-01737-00 Revision A
5.4.9 Standalone GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver (Optional Equipment)
Original Standalone GSR 56H Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the original unit is reinstalled. This does not include units
that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged Standalone GSR 56H is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchanged GSR 56H is installed the configuration files must be loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Options’.

8. Press the ENT key. The first optional item is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor).
9. Turn the small FMS knob. A window is displayed showing all of the available options:

Page 5-32 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Bell-Standalone GSR 56’:

11. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the configuration files:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-33

190-01737-00 Revision A
 12. Press the ‘CLR ALL’ softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
13. Press the ‘CHK GFG’ softkey.
14. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
15. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
16. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

17. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

GSR 56H Testing

Perform testing described in Section 6.8.

Page 5-34 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.4.10 GDL 69AH Satellite Data Link Receiver (Optional Equipment)
Original GDL 69AH Reinstalled
No software or configuration loading is required if the original unit is reinstalled. This does not include units
that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files were deleted during repair.
New, Repaired or Exchanged GDL 69AH is Installed
If a new, repaired or exchanged GDL 69AH is installed the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Options’.

8. Press the ENT key. The first optional item is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor).
9. Turn the small FMS knob. A window is displayed showing all of the available options:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-35

190-01737-00 Revision A
 10. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Bell-GDL 69A Installation Option’:

11. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

Page 5-36 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 12. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
13. Press the ‘CHK ALL’ softkey.
14. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
15. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
16. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

17. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

GDL 69AH Testing

Perform testing described in Section 6.17

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-37

190-01737-00 Revision A
5.4.11 GTS 800 TAS

Reinstalling an Original GTS 800

If a GTS 800 that was removed is reinstalled (same serial number), no software or configuration file loading is
required. This does not include units that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files
were deleted during repair.
Installing a New, Repaired, or Exchanged GTS 800
If a new, repaired or exchanged GDL 69AH is installed the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Options’.

8. Press the ENT key. The first optional item is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor).
9. Turn the small FMS knob. A window is displayed showing all of the available options:

Page 5-38 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Bell-GTS 800 TAS’:

11. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-39

190-01737-00 Revision A
 12. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
13. Press the ‘CHK ALL’ softkey.
14. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
15. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
16. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

17. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

GTS 800 TAS Testing

Perform testing described in Section 6.9.

Page 5-40 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
5.4.12 GDL 59H Data Link (optional equipment)

Reinstalling an Original GDL 59H

If a GDL 59H that was removed is reinstalled (same serial number), no software or configuration file loading is
required. This does not include units that were returned for repair since their software and configuration files
were deleted during repair.
Installing a New, Repaired, or Exchanged GDL 59H
If a new, repaired or exchanged GDL 59H is installed the correct software and configuration files must be
loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Options’.

8. Press the ENT key. The first optional item is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor).
9. Turn the small FMS knob. A window is displayed showing all of the available options:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-41

190-01737-00 Revision A
 10. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Bell-GDL 59’:

11. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the software and configuration files:

Page 5-42 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 12. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
13. Press the ‘CHK ALL’ softkey.
14. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
15. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
16. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

17. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

GDL 59H Testing

Perform testing described in Section 6.11.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-43

190-01737-00 Revision A
5.4.13 GSC 46 Signal Conditioner

Reinstalling an Original GSC 46

If a GSC 46 that was removed is reinstalled (same serial number), no software or configuration file loading is
required.
Installing a New, Repaired, or Exchanged GSR 46
If a new, repaired or exchanged GDL 59H is installed the correct configuration files must be loaded to the unit.
1. Insert the system software loader card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Place both displays in configuration mode.
3. On the PFD, press the NO softkey at ‘DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE SYSTEM FILES?’ prompt.
4. After the SYSTEM STATUS page appears on the PFD, use the small FMS knob and turn to the SYSTEM
UPLOAD page.
5. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted (flashing cursor) in the GROUP
window:

6. Turn the small FMS knob. A small window is displayed containing ‘Bell 407’ and ‘Options’:

7. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Options’.

8. Press the ENT key. The first optional item is displayed in the ITEM window (flashing cursor).
9. Turn the small FMS knob. A window is displayed showing all of the available options:

Page 5-44 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Turn the small FMS knob and highlight ‘Bell-GSR 56’:

1. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the configuration files:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 5-45

190-01737-00 Revision A
 2. Press the CLR ALL softkey. Checkmarks are removed from all boxes.
3. Press the ‘CHK GFC’ softkey.
4. Press the LOAD softkey. Wait for the files to load.
5. When the load is complete, press the ENT key to select OK in the Upload Complete window.
6. Verify that each box indicates the word PASS in green when the loading process has finished for that
file and observe the SUMMARY window as well to ensure that the load was successful (completed).

7. Turn off the system and reinsert the supplemental database cards in the bottom slot of each display.
Be sure to insert the card removed from the MFD back into the MFD.

GSC 46 Testing
No specific testing or calibration is required if a GSC 46 is replaced.

Page 5-46 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
SECTION 6―TESTING AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
The section contains testing and calibration procedures to ensure proper operation of an LRU after it has
been removed and reinstalled or before the system is returned to service after maintenance. This section
describes the minimum tests that should be performed after maintenance. The technician must also perform
any additional return to service tests required by the Bell Rotorcraft Maintenance Manual to verify correct
installation in the helicopter.
6.1 GDU 1040H MFD/PFD TESTING
Start displays in normal mode and allow to initialize for approximately one minute. The GRS 77H and GDC
74H require longer initialization periods than do the other LRUs. During startup, this causes the attitude,
airspeed, and altitude fields to be invalid during the first ~40-60 seconds of PFD power-up.
Check the PFD and MFD displays for the following:
1. Check that all COM/NAV display fields are valid in the top corners of the PFD.
2. Check that altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT fields are valid on The PFD.
3. Check that attitude and heading are valid (unless an AHRS calibration is required).
4. Check that the engine instrument fields are valid on the MFD.
5. Verify both displays enter reversionary mode (both should have valid altitude, airspeed, vertical
speed, and engine instruments).
6. Ensure navigation database is present.
6.2 GIA 63H INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT TESTING
6.2.1 GPS Signal Acquisition Test

Figure 6-1. AUX-GPS STATUS Page

The GIA 63H units normally acquire a 3D GPS navigation solution within 5-10 minutes of startup time,
provided the aircraft is outside (or indoors with a GPS repeater).

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
 NOTE
A date and/or time change may be required in some rare instances when the GPS receiver is
taking longer than normal to acquire.
6.2.1.1 GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the
appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite
acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
• No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
• Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
• Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
• Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
• Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
• ‘D’ indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
Select the GPS status page on the MFD (Figure 6-1). Two softkeys on the bottom of the display allow the user
to toggle between GPS 1 and GPS 2. Verify that both receivers show 3D navigation with a WAAS fix on the
MFD.
6.2.1.2 VHF COM Interference Test
This test must be conducted outside. Use of a GPS repeater inside a hangar may result in a failed test. Once
the signal acquisition test has been completed successfully, perform the following steps:
1. On the MFD, monitor GPS signal strength bars on the GPS Status page.
2. On the PFD, ensure that the CDI is set to GPS. If it is not, press the ‘CDI’ softkey until GPS ENR is
displayed.
3. Verify that the GPS ‘INTEG’ flag is out of view.
4. Select 121.150 MHz on the No. 1 COM transceiver.
5. Transmit for a period of 30 seconds while monitoring GPS 1 signal strength levels.
6. During the transmit period, verify that the GPS ‘INTEG’ flag does not come into view on the PFD and
verify that GPS 1 does not lose a 3-D navigation solution on the MFD.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 and re-transmit while monitoring GPS 2 signal levels on the MFD.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for the following frequencies:
x 121.175 MHz
x 121.200 MHz
x 131.250 MHz
x 131.275 MHz
x 131.300 MHz
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 for the No. 2 COM transceiver (GIA2).

Page 6-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Select the AUX-System Setup page on the MFD.
11. Under the COM CONFIG field, change the COM channel spacing from 25 kHz to 8.33 kHz.

12. Go back to the AUX-GPS Status page.

13. Select 121.185 MHz on the No. 1 COM transceiver (GIA1).
14. Transmit for a period of 35 seconds while monitoring GPS 1 signal strength levels.
15. During the transmit period, verify that the GPS ‘INTEG’ flag does not come into view on the PFD and
verify that GPS 1 does not lose a 3-D navigation solution on the MFD.
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 while monitoring the GPS 2 (GIA2) signal levels on the MFD.
17. Repeat steps 14 through 16 for each of the following frequencies:
x 121.190 MHz
x 130.285 MHz
x 131.290 MHz
18. Repeat steps 14 through 17 for the No. 2 COM transceiver (GIA2).
19. On the MFD, select the AUX-System Status page and change the COM channel spacing back to 25 kHz.
6.2.1.3 VOR/LOC/GS Test
Check the VOR, ILS, and Glideslope functions with ramp test equipment. Operate the equipment according to
the test equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust the RF signal to a level adequate to perform the test.
Note that the PFD CDI will not show a course deviation bar unless a valid VHF Nav frequency is tuned.
Simulate a VOR signal on radial 000° with a course-width of 20°. Verify full-scale deflection of the CDI while
applying a 10° deviation signal. Exercise the CDI with both right and left deviations for both NAV 1 and 2.
Exercise the Glideslope indicator with up and down deviation indications.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
6.3 GMA 350H AUDIO PANEL TESTING
6.3.1 Verify Failsafe Operation with a Mono Headset
1. Remove power to the audio panel.
2. Connect a mono headset to the pilot’s headset output jack and pilot’s mic jack.
NOTE
Use of a true mono headset is required for this test to insure proper wiring even if a stereo jack
is provided in the installation. Wiring left channel (tip contact) and right channel (ring contact)
backwards will cause failsafe mode not to function with mono headsets. Use of a true mono
headset is required for this test (not a stereo headset with a mono/stereo switch because
headset manufactures differ on how they accomplish this switching). This will guarantee the
condition of the right channel (ring terminal) being shorted to the return (sleeve terminal) by
the mono headset’s plug. This short occurs because of the physical design of the headset plug
contacts and is an inevitable consequence of plugging a mono headset into a stereo jack.
During power-on operation, this short will not damage the audio panel.
3. Verify that COM1 transceiver can be heard in the pilot’s headset.
4. Verify that COM1 can key and transmit the pilot’s mic audio by verifying received sidetone or checking
reception of the transmission with another radio tuned to receive this transmission (verify Pilot PTT
and mic operation is delivered to this transceiver).
5. Apply unit power by restoring the audio breaker to the normal operating position.
6.3.2 Verify Installed Transceivers (COMs) are able to Transmit and Receive
1. Connect a headset to the pilot’s headset output and mic input jack.
2. Verify each installed transceiver (COM) can be heard when selected.
NOTE
Depending on settings, the mic selected COM may mute audio from other COMs.
3. Verify that each installed transceiver keys for transmission and transmits clear audio from the pilot’s
mic when selected for transmission and the Pilot PTT key is pressed. (Because the audio panel can be
configured to simulate received sidetone internally, verifying transmission with a separate radio not
in the system is recommended.)
4. Move the headset to the copilot’s headset jacks and verify that any one of the installed transceivers
(testing each is not necessary) receives and transmits copilot mic properly as above.
6.3.3 Verify Audio from Installed Receiver and Alert Sources
1. Connect a headset to the pilot’s headset output and mic input jack (depending on configuration and
ICS mode, copilot or passenger positions may not hear all of these sources).
2. Verify each installed receiver (NAV/ADF/DME) can be heard when selected (use test signal
generators/transmitters when necessary).
3. Verify each installed unswitched (alert) source can be heard when the source is instructed to play a
simulated alert/message.
4. For the GMA 350H Traffic unit, verify the traffic audio wired to the TRFC input is heard when the TRFC
button is selected.

Page 6-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 NOTE
The TRFC button will default to the selected state after each power-up.
6.3.4 Verify Speaker Output (if installed)
1. Select the speaker output and verify any one transceiver or receiver is heard clearly.
2. Verify that any one unswitched (alert) source is heard clearly in the speaker (depending on
configuration, these may be heard in the speaker regardless of speaker selection).
3. Initiate PA (Passenger Address) mode and verify that from both the pilot and copilot position the
crew position that is pressing PTT has their mic delivered to the speaker clearly.
NOTE
If a loud squeal is heard while testing PA, it is because there is too much acoustic feedback
between the speaker and the mic. If they cannot be placed further apart, a lower volume
configuration should be used. In some installations, there is insufficient distance between the
speaker and crew seat positions for PA to speaker to reliably operate. In these conditions, the
“PA to speaker” volume can be set very low and PA audio will still be delivered to the
headsets.
6.3.5 Verify ICS (Intercom System) Operation
1. Place the audio panel into all ICS mode (refer to the applicable pilot’s guide) so that all ICS positions
hear all others.
2. Deselect or turn off other audio sources (MKR, transceivers, receivers, alerts). Some configurations
may mute passenger intercom audio to crew when aircraft audio is present.
3. From the pilot headset position, verify the pilot, copilot, and all passenger mic inputs can be heard in
the pilot’s headset when speaking into the mic input under test (adjust pilot ICS volume if necessary).
4. Speak into the pilot’s mic and verify that pilot mic audio is heard in the copilot headset (adjust copilot
ICS volume if necessary) and in each passenger headset (adjust passenger ICS volume if necessary.
6.3.6 Verify Telephone and Music Operation (if installed)
1. Deselect or turn off other audio sources (MKR, transceivers, receivers, alerts). Some configurations
may mute telephone and/or music audio when aircraft audio is present.
2. From the pilot’s headset position, initiate a phone call and verify that two-way communication over
the telephone can be heard when selected (refer to the applicable pilot’s guide for information on
how telephone and music audio can be distributed and insure that it is configured to be heard by the
pilot).
3. Verify that all installed music sources can be heard when selected (refer to the applicable pilot’s guide
for information on how telephone and music audio can be distributed and insure that it is configured
to be heard by the pilot).
6.3.7 Marker Beacon Operation (if installed)
1. With a marker signal generator/transmitter test set, generate Marker Tones.
2. From the pilot headset position, verify that marker audio can be heard when selected.
3. If the system includes integrated lamp annunciation and/or if external lamps are installed, verify that
each marker tone illuminates the proper lamp.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-5

190-01737-00 Revision A
 NOTE
The Marker Lamps will operate even if the marker audio is not selected.
x Outer Marker – Blue Lamp – 400 Hz (AM or received audio tone)
x Middle Marker – Amber Lamp – 1300 Hz (AM or received audio tone)
x Inner Marker – White Lamp – 3000 Hz (AM or received audio tone)
4. If the system is configured and/or wired to allow both HI and LO sensitivity operation, verify that
during HI SENS operation, the RF threshold is more sensitive (marker audio/indication occurs as a
lower RF power).
6.4 GDC 74H TESTING
NOTE
Allow unit to warm up for 15 minutes before performing the following tests.
Verification of the altimeter and airspeed must be performed using a pitot/static ramp tester. The static port
and altimeter must be verified in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) § 91.411
and Part 43, Appendix E. The MFD must be in reversionary mode to perform the tests outlined in Appendix E.
6.4.1 Preparing the System for Part 43 Appendix E Testing
1. Press and hold the ENT key on the PFD and apply system power. Allow the MFD to start in normal
mode.
2. On the PFD, rotate the FMS knob to until the display shows the GRS page group. Within the AIR DATA
1 and AIR DATA 2 (in dual ADC installations only) sub windows is the field “B ALT” which is Barometric
Altitude. B ALT is equivalent to the altitude that will be displayed to the pilot on the altitude display.
B ALT will be used for all CFR Part 43 Appendix E tests for system altitude.
3. Push the red reversionary button located between the displays. This activates the reversionary mode
for the MFD. Baro settings can now be read from the MFD for the CFR Part 43 Appendix E tests.
4. When viewing the baro setting for the second GDC in dual installations, press the ”SENSORS” softkey
on the MFD and then select “ADC 2”.
5. After completing the tests specified by § 91.411 and Part 43 Appendix E, return the MFD back to
normal mode by pushing the reversionary button.

Page 6-6 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 NOTE
The following tests are beyond the requirements set forth in Appendix E.
6.4.2 Airspeed Test
1. Use an Air Data Test Set (ADTS) to simulate air speeds shown in the table below. Wait for the ADTS to
report that target values have been achieved.
2. Verify that computed air speeds shown on the PFD are within the tolerances specified in the following
table:
Calibrated air speed, knots Allowed tolerance, ±knots
50 5.0
80 3.5
100 2.0
120 2.0
150 2.0
3. Press the “SENSOR” PFD softkey and then select ADC2 (if equipped). Repeat steps 1 and 2.
6.4.3 Static Port Vertical Speed (Rate of Climb) Test
1. Use the ADTS to change the altitude at the rates shown in the table below.
2. Wait for the ADTS to report that target rates have been achieved.
3. Verify that the rate of climb reported by the vertical speed field on the PFD is within the tolerances
specified in the table below:

Vertical Speed, feet/minute Allowed tolerance,

±feet/minute
2000 100
0 45
-2000 100
4. Press the “SENSOR” PFD softkey and then select ADC2 (if equipped). Repeat steps 1-3.
6.4.4 OAT Probe Test
Check the outside air temperature (OAT) measurement shown on the PFD to make sure it reads ambient
temperature.
6.4.5 Second OAT Probe Test in Dual ADC Installations
Select the ‘SENSORS’ softkey on the PFD then select ADC2 to view the second OAT in a dual ADC
equipped installation. Make sure it reads ambient temperature.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-7

190-01737-00 Revision A
6.5 GEA 71H TESTING
Each GEA 71H sensor input must be checked with the aircraft engine off. Verify all engine information systems
are valid on the MFD, and that no GEA 71H related alerts appear on the PFD. Exercise and test all discrete,
analog, and/or digital inputs and check for appropriate responses.
6.6 GTX 33H TRANSPONDER TESTING
NOTE
If the unit is removed from the aircraft and operated, always connect J3302, (and J3303 for
GTX 33D) to an antenna or a 50 Ω, 5-Watt load. The GTX 33H transmits Mode S acquisition
squitter replies about once per second whether interrogations are received or not.
Verify proper operation of the transponder by testing as specified in Appendix F of 14 CFR, Part 43, to AC 43-
6B, and/or other appropriate regulations. The test is typically done as a ramp test using a transponder ramp
test set, such as the TIC TR-220, IFR ATC-601 or other suitable Mode S transponder test set.
6.6.1 Self Test
Verify that the unit does not display a failure indication when turned on.
6.6.2 Altitude Input
Verify that the displayed altitude matches the altimeter pressure altitude (at 29.92).
6.6.3 External Inputs
If the external ident or standby inputs are connected, verify operation by:
1. Verify that the unit goes to standby when the external standby input is pulled low.
2. Verify that the ident indication turns on when the external ident button is pressed (must be in the
“ON” or “ALT” modes).
6.6.4 Performance (Ramp) Test
After installation, the transponder should be tested as specified in 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix F, AC 43-6B, and
other appropriate regulations. The test is typically done as a ramp test using a transponder ramp test set,
such as the IFR ATC-601A. The ramp test includes checks as follows:
x Reply Frequency
x Suppression
x Receiver Sensitivity
x Reply RF Output Power
x Mode S Diversity Channel Isolation (if applicable)
x Mode S Address
x Mode S Formats
x Mode S All-Call
x ATCRBS –Only All Call
x Squitter
x Reference AC 43-6B and 14 CFR Part 43, Appendix E (c): Altitude Reporting

Page 6-8 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
6.7 GDL 69AH TESTING
The GDL 69AH can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any altitude throughout the
Continental U.S. This section verifies correct operation of the GDL 69AH in the aircraft. Activate the XM data
link radio according to the following procedure.
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription. It is not required to activate both the entertainment and
weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69AH. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite
Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69AH,
allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-2)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at
www.garmin.com, P/N190-00355-04)
The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (AUX Page Group) is used to save GDL 69AH activation data
when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM Satellite Radio operation,
but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to the GDL 69AH XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further information.

Figure 6-2. AUX-XM Information Page

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-9

190-01737-00 Revision A
 1. Select the AUX – XM INFORMATION page on the MFD.
2. Using the channel control located in the cabin verify that you can select and deselect channels (the
white arrow to the left of the channel list indicates the currently selected channel). Select channel 1
when complete.
3. Using the volume control located in the cabin verify that you can increase and decrease the XM radio
volume (the volume bar at the bottom of the screen will show changes to the volume level). Set the
volume to the mid position when done.
4. Check channel and volume controls for proper operation using the GRC 10 Remote Control.
5. Plug a set of headphones into one of the passenger stations and make sure you can hear the XM radio
playing in both channels. Adjust the volume level to a comfortable level.
6. Plug a set of headphones into the pilot’s station and make sure you can hear the XM radio playing in
both channels. Adjust the volume level to a comfortable level. Repeat for copilot’s headphones.
6.8 GSR 56H TESTING
The optional GSR 56H Iridium Transceiver provides global airborne Iridium Satellite Telephone and SMS
messaging service. The telephone audio is provided through the audio panel and headset. Operation is
accomplished through the AUX-AUXILIARY COMMUNICATIONS Pages.
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting
the AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 6-3. Contact Garmin Flight Data Services on-line at
https://fly. garmin.com/fly-garmin/support/applications/satelliteservices/, or by telephone at 1-866-739-5687
in the United States or 913-440-1135.

Page 6-10 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 6-3. Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
6.9 GTS 800 TAS TESTING
6.9.1 Ground Test
The ground test verifies a functioning unit. The GTS 800 must be in Ground Test mode to select a scenario that
will properly converge and intercept the GTS 800. The aircraft must be on the ground and the GTS 800 must
be in Normal System mode and in Standby, to enable Ground Test mode.
NOTE
When an IFR6000 ramp tester is used with a GTS 800, the IFR6000 must be configured for a
distance that is 4 times the actual distance. For example, if the ramp tester is located 10 ft
away from an aircraft, the IFR6000 should be configured as if it were 40 ft away from the
aircraft. This will adjust the MTL setting of the IFR6000 such that it will see the GTS 800 low
power interrogations and reply to the interrogations.
NOTE
The GTS 800 will not accept the ground test command unless the unit is in standby and the
squat switch indicates the aircraft is on the ground.
NOTE
Configure Squat 'on-ground' sense as open if no sense switch is installed. Refer to the GTS 800
installation manual for more information.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-11

190-01737-00 Revision A
The ground test simulates the GTS 800 to be airborne at 50,000 ft with magnetic heading of 0°. Use a ramp
tester, such as a TIC TR220 or equivalent, to make the following setup and measurements to verify GTS 800
operational and surveillance functionality. Position the test set directional antenna with a clear line of sight to
the GTS 800 antenna at 90 degrees. With the GTS 800 powered up and in standby mode (indicated on the
CDTI), cycle the GTS 800 to “Operate.”
Select the following scenario:
• Intruder Type-ATCRBS Intruder Start Distance-10 NM
• Intruder Start Altitude-50,000 ft. Vertical Speed-0 fpm
• Velocity-360 Kts
Initiate the intruder scenario and verify that the following occurs:
• Traffic should be acquired at approximately 10 NM at 90 degree bearing and co-altitude. Observe
intruder closes on own aircraft at a rate of 0.1 NM/sec. Verify that only a single target is displayed in
the expected quadrant.
• The intruder should transition from Other Traffic (displayed as an open diamond with 00 displayed
above), to proximate traffic (displayed as a filled white diamond with 00 displayed above), to a Traffic
Advisory (TA) alarm.
• The appropriate TA symbology (yellow filled circle with 00 displayed above) displayed, and an audio
annunciation of “Traffic! 3 O'clock! Same Altitude! 3 Miles!”, when the intruder approaches within 3
NM.
NOTE
When a GTS 800 is configured not to have a Radar Altimeter installed and the gear is extended
(in a retractable gear aircraft), the audio annunciation of traffic will be inhibited.
6.9.2 System Test Mode

The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the system is operating normally. The test takes ten
seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-4). The voice alert “TAS System Test Passed” or “TAS System Test Failed” is issued
when the test is complete, and the traffic system will be in Standby Mode.
Testing the traffic system:
1. Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3. Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for the full test pattern to be displayed.
4. Select the TEST Softkey.
Or:
1. Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2. Press the ENT Key.

Page 6-12 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 6-4. System Test in Progress with Test Pattern

6.10 GRS 77H AHRS TESTING

Verify attitude and heading on the PFD in normal mode. The AHRS attitude and heading information
displayed should become valid within one minute of power-up provided both GPS receivers have a valid
position. If GPS is unavailable, AHRS initialization may take as long as 2 minutes (the aircraft must remain
stationary).
Test the AHRS reversionary paths by pressing the red reversionary mode button on the audio panel located
between the displays. Make sure both displays have valid AHRS information.
6.11 GDL 59H TESTING
To test the GDL 59H, ensure the following:
1. Make sure the G1000H can complete a connext data request.
2. No abnormal messages should appear in the status request window in the connext data request
menu (bottom window, Figure 6-5).
3. Make sure no GDL 59H messages advisories are displayed on the PFD.
4. Make sure the GDL 59H is registered with Garmin Flight Services:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-13

190-01737-00 Revision A
 x In order to activate the GDL 59H for Garmin Flight Data Services, please contact Garmin Product
Support at one of the following numbers (M-F, 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Standard Time, - Central
USA):
• 1.866.739.5687 (toll free in USA)
• +1.913.440.1135 (worldwide)
x Please have the following information ready prior to calling:
• If activating services for a GDL59H-only installation
• Aircraft tail number, serial number, manufacturer, and model
• GDL 59H serial number
• G1000 system ID number
• If activating services for a GDL59H and GSR 56H installation
• Aircraft tail number, serial number, manufacturer, and model
• Serial number(s) of all GSR 56H units installed in aircraft
• G1000H system ID number
• Name of aircraft owner and contact information
• Credit card information

Figure 6-5. Connext Data Request Menu

Page 6-14 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
6.12 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
6.12.1 GEA 71H High-Side Current Monitor Calibration Procedure
This procedure must be performed anytime a GEA 71H is replaced, or anytime GEA 71H configuration is
loaded to an aircraft in the field. If none of the aforementioned conditions exist, check accuracy of amps
readings to determine if HSCM calibration is necessary.
In the Aircraft
1. Make sure that the sensor (ALT1, ALT2, and BAT1 shunts) in question has been energized at operating
voltage, but is isolated from current flow (both high and low inputs to the GEA should be at the same
high voltage).
On the MFD

1. Power up PFD in config mode.

2. Power on the MFD in configuration mode and select the HSCM CALIBRATION page (third page in the
CAL page group).
3. Unlock the page using the softkey sequence 2, 3, 4, 5.
4. Select the appropriate GEA from the HSCM ENABLED GEA selection box.

Figure 6-6. HSCM Enabled GEA Selection Box

5. Select the appropriate channel from the HSCM ENABLED GEA I/O CHANNEL selection box. Make sure
the displayed sensor in the CONFIGURED INPUT TYPE field matches the sensor desired for calibration.

Figure 6-7. HSCM Enabled GEA I/O A Channel Selection Box

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-15

190-01737-00 Revision A
 6. Make sure all displayed Current and Calibration data is appropriate:
a. CURRENT DATA:
i. VALUE –the instantaneous reading from the GEA if the current offset was zero (any
calibration offset has been taken out).
ii. CURRENT OFFSET –the calibration offset that is presently loaded on the channel (this
will be zero if the channel has never been calibrated).
iii. CURRENT CORRECTED VALUE – the current output of the GEA channel with the above
current offset applied (what would be displayed on the EIS strip if the GDU was in
normal mode). If the channel is calibrated and the calibration setup is correct, this
parameter should be near zero, and fluctuation should be minimal. Be sure to take
note of the range of fluctuation.
b. CALIBRATION DATA:
i. VALUE –the instantaneous current reading from the GEA if the current offset was zero
(any calibration has been taken out).
ii. CALIBRATION OFFSET –the instantaneous calculation of what the offset should be in
order to properly calibrate the channel (assuming the shunt is properly set up for
calibration, see step 1).
iii. CALIBRATION CORRECTED VALUE - the output of the GEA channel if the above offset
were applied (should always be zero).
7. Press the STORE softkey, the following calibrate confirmation box appears:

Figure 6-8. Calibrate Confirmation Box

8. Press the ENT Key to accept the CALIBRATION OFFSET value. The instantaneous CALIBRATION
OFFSET value is stored as the CURRENT OFFSET.
9. The system will now re-verify the GEA configuration (this may take several minutes). During this time
the box shown in Figure 6-9 is displayed. Do not perform any actions until this is complete.

Figure 6-9. Configuration Verification Processing

Page 6-16 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. When the configuration is complete, press the ENT key to confirm.

Figure 6-10. Configured Confirmation Box

Once verification is complete, the CURRENT CORRECTED VALUE should be zero, within a range of fluctuation
that is equal to or less than noted prior to calibration. If this is the case, the calibration has been successfully
completed.
6.12.2 GRS 77H/GMU 44 Calibration Procedure
NOTE
System software allows valid outputs from the AHRS, prior to completion of the AHRS and
magnetometer calibration procedures, as long as the GRS 77H can definitively determine
that the aircraft is not moving. This gives a technician the ability to perform functional tests
during aircraft assembly that require valid AHRS outputs. Additionally, a ‘CALIBRATE
AHRS/MAG’ message is displayed on the PFD until a successful magnetic calibration has been
completed.
The criteria used by the AHRS to determine the aircraft is moving are as follows:
1. If valid GPS data is available and each component of 3D GPS velocity is less than 4
knots, the aircraft is considered ‘not moving’ and attitude/heading will become valid.
2. If valid 3D GPS data is not available, but valid true airspeed is less than 30 knots, the
aircraft is considered ‘not moving’ and attitude/heading will become valid.
3. If both 3D GPS and true airspeed are unavailable, attitude/heading will not become
valid.
No configuration is required for the GRS 77H, unless the mounting bolts that secure the mounting rack are
loosened. If the mounting bolts are loosened a new post-installation calibration is required. Any GMU 44 that
is removed and/or replaced requires a magnetometer calibration.
The following calibration procedures are performed on the aircraft:
NOTE
Procedure C is not required and should not be performed on Bell rotorcraft.
x Pitch/Roll Offset (Procedure A1)
x Magnetometer Calibration (Procedure B)
x Engine Run-Up Vibration Test (Procedure D)

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-17

190-01737-00 Revision A
 x Magnetometer Interference Test (Procedure E)
Turn the PFD and MFD off by pulling the PFD and MFD circuit breakers. Restart both displays in configuration
mode. Follow the steps given for each procedure on the PFD GRS/GMU CALIBRATION page. The CALIBRATE
command cannot be selected and activated until the installer acknowledges all required steps have been
carried out by pressing the ENT key for each step.

Condition Calibration Procedure Required

A1 B D
Removed or replaced the GRS 77 without loosening None Required
mounting rack bolts Continue to Test Section
Replaced the GRS 77 and loosened mounting rack bolts X X X
Replaced the GRS 77 Configuration Module X X X
Replaced the GMU 44 X
GMU 44 was temporarily removed and reinstalled in the None Required
same location Continue to Test Section

Page 6-18 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
6.12.2.1 Procedure A1: Pitch/Roll Offset Calibration

Figure 6-11. Pitch/Roll Offset Procedure

This procedure must be performed for both GRS 77 units if two are installed in the aircraft. This procedure
must be carried out with the engine off.
1. Level the aircraft to 1.2° pitch nose up and wings level.
2. Initiate the AHRS Ground Pitch/Roll Aircraft Level compensation mode by performing the following
steps:
a) Enter Configuration Mode and go to GRS/GMU CALIBRATION page as shown in Figure 6-3.
b) This page is protected and requires a keystroke password to perform the calibration. Press
the following softkeys in sequence:
x Softkey 9
x Softkey 10
x Softkey 11
x Softkey 12
c) Ensure that the GRS77 #1 is selected.
d) Select PITCH/ROLL OFFSET, then press the ENT key.
e) Follow the checklist items displayed on the PFD and press the ENT key as each one is
completed or confirmed. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the
procedure.
f) After several seconds, a new checklist appears in the lower half of the PFD. Press the ENT key
as each item is confirmed. When the CONFIRM AIRCRAFT IS LEVEL field is blinking, press the
ENT key to continue.
3. The result of the pitch/roll offset compensation is displayed on the PFD. If successful, the AHRS
records the required pitch and roll offsets, informs the operator of a successful conclusion and returns
to normal operation.
4. Press the ENT key on the PFD. Repeat steps for GRS77 #2 if installed.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-19

190-01737-00 Revision A
6.12.2.2 Procedure B: Magnetometer Calibration

Figure 6-12. Magnetometer Calibration Procedure

Calibration Procedure B must be performed for both GRS/GMU installation pairs installed in the aircraft.
Calibration Procedure A1 must be successfully completed prior to attempting this procedure.
Calibration Procedure B must be carried out on a calibrated compass rose or magnetically clean area in order
to guarantee measurements free of environmental magnetic disturbances. Attempting to carry out this
maneuver on a typical ramp area will not yield a successful calibration. The accuracy of the AHRS cannot be
guaranteed if this calibration is not performed on a compass rose or in a magnetically clean area. If a
compass rose is not available, a site (usually at the end of a ramp away from buildings and steel structures)
can be evaluated for use per Section 5.9 of the Garmin GRS77/GMU44 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00303-10
(available for free download from Garmin’s Dealers Only website). If the site passes the test per the
requirements of Section 5.9, it completes the magnetometer calibration procedure (repeating it below is not
necessary) and may be used as a location to perform the magnetometer calibration procedure in the future.
Taxi the aircraft to a compass rose. Ensure that there are no nearby magnetic materials on or near the
perimeter of the compass rose. If unavoidable, maneuver the aircraft to keep the magnetometer from passing
within twenty feet (6.1 meters) of such objects. Additionally ensure that vehicles or other aircraft are
adequate distance away from the aircraft under test.
At the compass rose, align the aircraft with a heading of magnetic north (5°) with sufficient offset to the left
(west) of the North/South axis to allow a clockwise turn around the compass rose to be performed. See the
following figure.

W E

Page 6-20 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
With the aircraft stationary, initiate the GRS77 AHRS magnetometer calibration procedure as follows:
1. Place the MFD and PFD in configuration mode.
2. On the PFD, turn the FMS outer knob clockwise until the GRS Page Group is selected.
3. At the GRS Page Group, turn the inner FMS to display the GRS/GMU Calibration page.
4. The GRS/GMU Calibration page is protected and requires a keystroke password to perform the
calibration. Press the following softkeys in sequence:
x Softkey 9
x Softkey 10
x Softkey 11
x Softkey 12
5. Press the FMS inner knob to highlight GRS77 #1. The FMS inner knob can now be turned to select either
GRS77 #1 or GRS77 #2 for calibration. Press the ENT key after selecting the desired GRS77 unit to
calibrate. The SELECT PROCEDURE field is now blinking.
6. Using the FMS inner knob, select MAGNETOMETER and press the ENT key. If the MAGNETOMETER
selection continues to blinking, press the ENT key again.
7. Follow the checklist items displayed on the PFD and press the ENT key as each one is completed or
confirmed. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the procedure.
8. The PFD advises the operator when to turn the aircraft, when to stop, and when to turn again.
9. Upon instruction to turn, taxi the aircraft in a right turn. After approximately 30° of turn from the last
heading the PFD instructs the operator to stop the aircraft.
NOTE
Due to the difficulties in executing smooth, accurate turns the PFD may incorrectly interpret a station and
instruct to ‘HOLD POSITION’ prior to full completion of a 30q turn. If this scenario is encountered, it is best
for the operator to ignore the ‘HOLD POSITION’ command and instead use outside references to complete
the approximate 30q turn. Instead of using the PFD instruction to turn as a real-time indication of when to
turn, simply judge the 30° (±5°) turn increments of the aircraft by using the compass rose radials. Dwelling
at these 30q increments for the time recommended by the PFD should result in successful calibration.
10. The PFD guides the operator to dwell at multiple headings around a complete circle.
NOTE
Due to high winds or excessive airframe vibration, the operator may encounter a condition
where the PFD restarts the 18-second countdown without full completion of the previous
countdown. If this is encountered more than once for a given station, the operator should
begin turning to the next station (approximately 30q). A minimum of 2 successful stations per
quadrant is required, where a successful station is a full 18-second countdown followed by
instruction to move. Ensure that if stations are skipped, at least a minimum of 2 stations per
quadrant are completed. Thus, it may sometimes be required to dwell at a station after a
countdown restart. A maximum of 30 stations is allowed for the entire calibration procedure.
If too many countdown restarts are encountered, the calibration will fail with the message,
‘TOO MANY STATIONS.’
11. Repeat the turn-and-stop process until the PFD instructs the operator that a successful calibration is
complete.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-21

190-01737-00 Revision A
12. Press the ENT key on the PFD.
13. Repeat procedure for GRS77 #2 if installed.
6.12.2.3 Procedure D: Engine Run-Up Vibration Test

Figure 6-13. Engine Run-Up

This procedure must be performed for both GRS77 units (if two are installed) in the aircraft. Calibration
Procedures A1 and B are not required prior to this procedure.
1. Press the FMS inner knob to highlight GRS77 #1. The FMS inner knob can now be turned to select
either GRS77 #1 or GRS77 #2 for calibration. Press the ENT key after selecting the desired GRS77 unit
to calibrate. The SELECT PROCEDURE field is now blinking.
2. Initiate the AHRS engine run-up vibration test procedure by performing the following steps:
a) Select the ENGINE RUN-UP TEST procedure and press the ENT key.
b) Follow the checklist items displayed on the PFD, and press the ENT key as each one is completed
or confirmed. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the procedure.
3. The PFD display instructs the operator to gradually increase power from idle to full throttle and back
to idle over a period of 2-4 minutes.
4. When the operator has completed the engine run-up and the engine is back to an idle setting, press
the ENT key to indicate that the process is complete. When this is done, the TEST COMPLETE field
stops blinking.
5. The PFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the vibration test. If the test fails,
the specific measurements causing the failure are identified and numeric values are displayed on the
PFD.
If failures are indicated, the engine run-up test may be repeated once or at most twice. If the test does not
pass after three attempts, then the installation should not be considered reliable until the source of the
vibration problem is identified and remedied.
In the event of repeated failure of the engine run-up test, record the values that are reported to be out of
range for future reference.
The following are potential causes for failure of the engine run-up test:
a) Excessive flexibility of GRS77 and/or GMU44 mechanical mounting with respect to airframe.
b) Vibrational motion of GRS77 and/or GMU44 caused by neighboring equipment and/or
supports.
Page 6-22 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 c) Mounting of GRS77 at a location that is subject to severe vibrations (for example, close to an
engine mount.)
d) Mounting screws and other hardware for GRS77 and/or GMU44 not firmly attached.
e) Absence of mounting supports recommended by the aircraft manufacturer.
f) GRS77 connector not firmly attached to unit.
g) Cabling leading to GRS77 or GMU44 not firmly secured to supporting structure.
h) An engine / propeller that is significantly out of balance.
In some aircraft, attempting the engine run-up test on a day with very strong and/or gusty winds may
cause the test to occasionally fail. However, windy conditions should not be taken as evidence that
the test would pass in calm conditions; an actual pass is required before the installation can be
considered adequate.
6. Press the ENT key on the PFD.
7. Repeat procedure for GRS77 #2 if installed.
With the system in normal mode, the aircraft can now be taxied back and the engine can be shut down for
final testing. When the PFD powers up in normal mode, the AHRS attitude and heading information displayed
should become valid within 1 minute of power-up.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-23

190-01737-00 Revision A
6.12.2.4 Procedure E: Magnetometer Interference Test

Note: during AHRS/Magnetometer calibration the message “Calibration Error” can appear even though the
mag interference test passes. No magnetism issues, swapping the GMU doesn’t work, and no wiring issues.
The problem could be that the top of the AHRS to the mag bracket was 8 degrees different in pitch. A shim
was used to level the bracket causing the error to go away. Technicians should perform the following checks
if the “Calibration Error” appears during GRS/GMU calibration:

x Check the relative orientation between GRS 77 and GMU 44

x Change the location where the MagCal is being conducted

Figure 6-14. Magnetometer Interference

NOTE
A magnetometer interference test is available for troubleshooting and/or verifying a
magnetically ‘clean’ installation of the GMU 44. This test exercises various devices on
the aircraft that could affect the magnetic field as measured by the GMU 44 (examples
include navigation/strobe lights, control servos, etc). It is generally not necessary to
start the aircraft engine to run this test (in certain instances where it is suspected that
the alternator or magnetos are causing magnetic interference, it may be appropriate
to start the engine and turn the alternator on and then off during a portion of the test).
Procedures A1, B, C and D are not required before performing this test.
1. Apply system power, insuring both MFD and PFD are in configuration mode.
2. Go to the GRS/GMU CALIBRATION page on the PFD.
3. Press the following softkeys in order to unlock the page: 9, 10, 11, 12.
4. In the SELECT GRS UNIT window, use the FMS knob and ENT key to select the GRS 77 you need to test.
5. Move the cursor to the SELECT PROCEDURE window and use the FMS knob and ENT key to select MAG
INTERFERENCE TEST.
6. Follow the checklist items on the PFD, and press the ENT key as each one is completed or confirmed.
When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the procedure.
7. Follow the checklist items displayed on the PFD, and press the ENT key as each one is completed or
confirmed.

Page 6-24 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 NOTE
The third item on the checklist instructs the operator to “prepare a detailed test sequence
with precise start and stop times for exercising all electronic devices”. Only the electronic
devices that are likely to affect the operation of the GMU 44 magnetometer need be
included in the test sequence. The list of relevant electronic devices varies from aircraft to
aircraft. An example of an appropriate test sequence is given in Table 6-x.
Table 6-1. Magnetometer Interference Test Sequence
Elapsed Time Action
Since Start of
Test
(min:secs)
0:00 Test begins
0:10 Aileron full right
0:20 Aileron full left
0:30 Aileron level
0:40 Flaps down
0:50 Flaps up
1:00 Navigation lights on
1:10 Navigation lights off
1:20 Landing lights on
1:30 Landing lights off
1:40 Strobes on
1:50 Strobes off
2:00 Turn on all wing-tip lights simultaneously
(typically will include navigation lights,
recognition lights and strobe)
2:10 Turn off all wing-tip lights simultaneously
2:20 Pitot heat on
2:30 Pitot heat off
2:40 End of test

8. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the procedure, and have a stopwatch
ready to begin recording the elapsed time.
NOTE
It is important that the “time equals zero” moment corresponds with the moment the PFD
first displays the blinking TEST COMPLETE? message below:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-25

190-01737-00 Revision A
 9. The operator should carry out the actions called for in the prepared test sequence.
NOTE
It is important that all actions are carried out in the order and at the precise elapsed time
as specified in the prepared test sequence.
10. When the actions in the test sequence have been completed, press the ENTER button to indicate that
the process is complete. When this is done, the TEST COMPLETE field stops blinking.
11. The PFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the magnetometer interference
test. If the test passes, no further action is required for this test.
12. If the test fails, the installation should be considered unreliable until the source of magnetic
interference is identified and remedied. When the magnetometer interference test fails, record the
three magnetometer maximum deviation values and their corresponding timestamps. Any maximum
deviation value greater than 2.5 milliGauss indicates a problem that must be resolved. Compare the
corresponding timestamps with the prepared test sequence to identify which action produced the
problem. Contact Garmin for assistance in resolving the problem.
NOTE
Two common reasons for a failed magnetometer interference test are: new equipment is
installed in close proximity to the GMU 44 magnetometer, and an existing or new electronic
device has become grounded through the aircraft structure instead of via the proper ground
wire in a twisted shielded pair.
13. Press the ENT key on the PFD to conclude this procedure.

Page 6-26 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
6.13 GDC 74H FIELD CALIBRATION UTILITY
The GDC 74H Field Calibration utility (P/N T06-A0156-00) is designed to adjust the calibration of GDC 74H units
that have failed the 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E tests due to altitude drift.
6.13.1 Limitations
x These procedures should be performed on the bench (not in aircraft) at room temperature.
x The GDC 74H Field Calibration utility should only be used to correct errors due to altitude drift.
x If the drift is greater than the limits defined in the GDC 74H Field Calibration utility at any of the test
points, the utility will not allow the calibration to continue and the GDC 74H unit must be returned to
Garmin.
x If the GDC 74H unit does not pass 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E after the calibration utility has been run,
the GDC 74H unit should be returned to Garmin.
6.13.2 Requirements
x GDC 74H unit
x Power supply (14/28V, 500mA)
x PC with a Serial Port or serial port adapter.
x Pressure control system capable of generating the correct static pressures for 0 feet, 11,000 feet,
30,000 feet, and 41,000 feet.
NOTE
Field calibration of GDC 74A units requires a pressure control system with altitude accuracy
equal to or better than ±5 feet at sea level, ±15 feet at 30,000 feet, and ±15 feet at 41,000 feet.
For calibration of GDC 74A, the pressure control system must control altitude automatically.
x Fabricate a cable built to interface a GDC 74(X) to a PC Serial Port (see Figure 6-15). Cable is not
available from Garmin.

Figure 6-15. GDC 74H - PC Interface Cable

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-27

190-01737-00 Revision A
6.13.3 Software Installation
Before beginning the software field upgrade procedure, the GDC 74H Field Calibration utility must be
downloaded from the Garmin website.

1. Enter the Dealer Resource portion of the Garmin website (and www.garmin.com).
2. From the Technical Resource list, click on the link for the GDC 74H Field Calibration utility.
3. Follow the instructions to save the file to the PC (it is recommended to create a folder ‘C:\Garmin’ as a
target directory for the file).
6.13.4 Procedure
1. Connect GDC 74H to the pressure control system.
2. Connect the GDC 74H to the PC serial port using the GDC 74H – PC Interface Cable (Figure
2-10).
3. Connect the GDC 74H - PC Interface Cable to the power supply (Figure 6-15).
4. Power on the GDC 74H and the pressure control system.
5. Set the pressure control system to a pressure altitude of 40,000 feet and determine that leakage is less
than 140 feet per minute.
6. Run GDC_FieldCal.exe.
7. Click on ‘Begin Field Calibration’.
NOTE

The GDC 74H Field Calibration utility requires that the GDC 74H and the pressure control
system be powered on for a minimum of 20 minutes before calibration.

Figure 6-16. GDC 74H Field Calibration Utility, Main Page

8. Select the Serial Port on the PC that will be used to communicate with the GDC 74H, and click ‘OK’.

Page 6-28 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 6-17. Serial Port Pull-down List
9. After communication with the GDC 74H is established, the ‘Full Backup’ screen appears while a full
backup of the original unit setting is saved to a file named BKUP_(serial_num)_YYYYMMDD_
HHMMSS.txt. This file can be used (by Garmin) to restore the unit to the original settings if necessary.
10. After the full backup file has been created, the ‘Prepare To Take Measurements’ screen appears while
the program retrieves the unit type from the GDC 74H.
11. After the unit type has been determined, the ‘Set altitude to 0 ft’ screen (Figure 6-18) appears.
12. Per the on-screen instructions, set the pressure control system to a pressure altitude of 0 feet.
13. Allow the on-screen altitude reading to stabilize, then click ‘OK’.

Figure 6-18. 0 Feet Calibration Screen

NOTE

If any of the three measurements (Altitude, Vertical Speed, and Power On Time) are outside of
their respective displayed limits, the displayed measurement will appear in red, and the ‘OK’
button will be unavailable (grayed-out). If successful calibration is not achievable, clicking
‘Cancel’ will halt the program and produce the below popup message.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-29

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Figure 6-19. Calibration Failed Screen
14. After the 0 feet calibration is complete, the ‘Set altitude to 11,000 ft’ screen appears.
15. Per the on-screen instructions, set the pressure control system to a pressure altitude of 11,000 feet.
16. Allow the on-screen altitude reading to stabilize, then click ‘OK’.
17. After the 11,000 feet calibration is complete, the ‘Set altitude to 30,000 ft’ screen appears.
18. Per the on-screen instructions, set the pressure control system to a pressure altitude of 30,000 feet.
19. Allow the on-screen altitude reading to stabilize, then click ‘OK’.

20. After the 30,000 feet calibration is complete, the ‘Set altitude to 41,000 ft’ screen appears.
21. Per the on-screen instructions, set the pressure control system to a pressure altitude of 41,000 feet.
22. Allow the on-screen altitude reading to stabilize, then click ‘OK’.
23. After the altitude calibrations are complete, the ‘Program Calibration to Unit?’ screen (Figure
6-20) appears. Click ‘OK’ to program the new calibration to the GDC 74(X) unit.
NOTE

Before the new calibration is written to the unit, the program stores the current calibration to
a file named CAL_(serial_num)_YYYYMMDD_ HHMMSS.txt that can be used to restore the
original calibration back to the unit if needed (refer to the “To Restore Original Calibration”
section).

Figure 6-20. Program Calibration to Unit Screen

24. Ensure that the pop-up cal result window shows ‘PASSED’, press ‘OK’ to confirm message.

Page 6-30 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 6-21. Field Calibration Result Screen
25. Return the pressure control system to ambient pressure before disconnecting the pitot and static
lines from the GDC 74H.
26. Click on ‘Exit’ in the upper left corner to exit the program.
27. The Field Calibration is now completed, the unit may be installed in the aircraft (per the instructions
in this manual) to perform the operational system testing portion of 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E.
6.13.5 To Restore Original Calibration (if needed)
If needed, the original calibration can be restored to the unit using the following steps.
1. Run GDC_FieldCal.exe.
2. Select ‘Restore’ from the upper left-hand corner of the page.
3. Select the CAL_(serial_num)_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.txt calibration file to restore to the unit and click
‘Open’.

Figure 6-22. Calibration Files Screen

4. Select the Serial Port on the PC that will be used to communicate with the GDC 74H, and click ‘OK’.
5. A progress bar screen appears while the calibration is being restored to the unit.
6. If cal restoration is successful, the screen will display ‘Completed’, before returning to the main entry
screen.
7. Click on ‘Exit’ in the upper left corner to exit the program.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 6-31

190-01737-00 Revision A
 8. The original calibration is now restored, the unit may be installed in the aircraft (per the instructions
in this manual) to perform the operational system testing portion of 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E.
6.13.6 Calibration File Storage
Save copies of the calibration (BKUP and CAL) files for permanent storage, these files will be located in the
C:\Garmin directory, or in the same directory where the GDC_FieldCal.exe file resides. Also, email copies
of these files to [email protected]. Please enter “GDC 74(X) Field Calibration Data” in the subject line,
as shown in Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23. Example Post-Calibration E-mail

6.13.7 Software Version
To display the software version of the GDC 74H Calibration Utility.

1. Click on ‘About’ in the upper right hand corner of the program, the software version is displayed.

Figure 6-24. About Screen

2. Click ‘OK’ to return to previous screen.

Page 6-32 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
SECTION 7―PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

This section contains general periodic maintenance procedures for the G1000H. For regulatory periodic
functional checks and for actual aircraft maintenance requirements refer to Bell rotorcraft maintenance
manual or manual supplements.
7.1 CONDITIONAL MAINTENANCE
All LRUs in the G1000H are subject to conditional maintenance with exceptions described in the following
sections.
7.2 PITOT/STATIC LEAK TEST
Perform a pitot/static leak test as described in Title 14 CFR §§ 91.411 and Part 43 Appendix E.
NOTE
Per Garmin Service Advisory 0606, prior to the start of a pitot static test allow the GDC 74H to
operate at least 15 minutes.
7.3 ALTIMETER (GDC 74H and PFD)
Per Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(2), Garmin specifies a test procedure equivalent to Part 43 Appendix E,
paragraph (b)(1) with two exceptions. The tests of sub-paragraphs (iv) (Friction) and (vi) Barometric Scale
Error) are not applicable because the digital outputs of the GDC 74H are not susceptible to these types of
errors.
7.4 AIRSPEED FUNCTION TEST (GDC 74H and PFD)
Check for correct indication.
7.5 VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (GDC 74H and PFD)
Check for correct indication.
7.6 GTX 33H TRANSPONDER
Test according to Title 14 CFR §§ 91.411 and 91.413 as well as Part 43 Appendix F.
7.7 GRS 77H EARTH MAGNETIC FIELD UPDATES
The GRS 77H utilizes an earth magnetic field model, which is updated once every five years. The update is
expected to be available from Garmin by July 1 of each of the following years: 2010, 2015, and every five years
thereafter, so long as the GRS 77 remains a Garmin-supported product. Otherwise maintenance of the GRS
77H is ‘on condition of failure’ only.
7.8 GDL 69AH SATELLITE DATA LINK RECEIVER
No schedule servicing tasks or internal manual adjustments are required on the GDL 69AH. If installation
requires use of audio suppression inputs, each installed input must be verified for proper operation on an
annual basis.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 7-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Blank Page

Page 7-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
SECTION 8—G1000H SOFTWARE LOADING AND CONFIGURATION
Section 5 describes how to load software to a replacement LRU (“target loading”). This section describes how
to load system software should it become necessary. Load system software only after talking with Garmin
Field Service to find out if there is an alternate solution to a problem. Loading system software should be a
last resort when all other troubleshooting efforts have been exhausted.
NOTE
Use only SanDisk cards to load system software and configuration files.
8.1 SYSTEM SOFTWARE LOADING OVERVIEW
Figure 8-1 gives an overview of the software/configuration installation sequence for the system.

Figure 8-1. System Software Loading Sequence

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-1

190-01737-00 Revision A
8.2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE LOADING PROCEDURE
NOTE
Remove supplemental database cards from the lower slot of both displays before loading
software Not removing the cards can corrupt them. Replacing corrupted database cards are
not covered under warranty.
NOTE
Connect a ground power unit to the aircraft for software loading. Do not rely on only the
aircraft batteries to prevent loss of power during the software loading process. DO NOT
ALLOW POWER TO BE REMOVED FROM THE SYSTEM WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE! Remove
power only when told to do so by the following procedure. As a general rule all displays
should be in the same mode (configuration or normal), unless instructed differently.
8.2.1 Software Part Numbers
Software part numbers and software versions are not listed in this manual. For actual software versions and
part numbers refer to Bell maintenance documentation.
NOTE
Screen shots and examples in this section are used to illustrate the software and
configuration loading process. They are representations only. Always refer to the Bell
approved drawing for the correct software file names, versions, and part numbers.
8.2.2 System Power Up
1. Turn on the ground power unit (if used).
2. Turn on the BATTERY master switches.
3. Turn on the AVIONICS MASTER switch. All system equipment should be receiving power.
8.2.3 Cooling Fan Check
1. Verify display cooling fan operation. If necessary, remove each display temporarily and visually make
sure they are operating.
2. Make sure the avionics cooling fans in the remote avionics bay are operating.
8.2.4 Loading MFD and PFD Software
1. Pull the MFD and PFD circuit breakers.
2. Insert the correct loader card into the top card slot on the MFD.
3. While holding the rightmost softkey on the MFD, restore power by closing the MFD circuit breaker.
4. When the words ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appear in the upper left corner of the MFD, release the key.
5. ‘Do You Want To Update System Files?’ appears. Press the YES softkey. An ‘Updating System Files
Please Wait’ message appears. New software is now being loaded to the MFD. After the system files
are loaded to the MFD the user will be prompted to load the splash screen. Refer to step 8. When
complete, the MFD starts in configuration mode.
6. Remove the loader card from the MFD and insert it into the top card slot on the PFD. Repeat steps 3
through 5 for the PFD.

Page 8-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 7. When the PFD load is complete, it starts in the configuration mode. Do not remove power. After the
system files are loaded to the PFD the user will be prompted to load the splash screen. Refer to step 8.
8. Update the splash screen after loading the MFD and PFD files.
NOTE
For the rest of the software/configuration procedure, do not operate the MFD while loading
software or configuration unless specifically instructed to do so. A failed or cancelled load
may result.
8.2.5 Crossfill Monitoring System
After a configuration file upload to an MFD or PFD is complete, it has only been verified on PFD, and not on
any other device. If the technician powers down the devices before the configuration has been sent to the
other devices on the crossfill network, it is possible that the other devices may not have received the entire
configuration. When these devices are powered on with missing or invalid configuration, they may revert to a
default, safe configuration, and then that new configuration will be crossfilled to the other devices (including
the original device that has the correct configuration), erasing the uploaded configuration. The Crossfill
Monitoring System prevents that from happening by waiting until crossfill has completed to declare the
upload complete, at which point it is safe to power down the devices.
While the Crossfill Monitor is waiting for crossfill to complete, a progress bar displays the percentage of the
10-minute timeout that has elapsed. This bar does not display the crossfill progress. When crossfill is
complete, the bar will be set to 100%, the Crossfill Monitor will display a message to the technician that the
upload is complete, and the OK button will appear, concluding the upload process.

The Crossfill Monitor immediately fails if it detects that a configured LRU (PFD or MFD) is not online. This is
because an offline device could cause the problem the monitoring system was meant to prevent if it did not
receive the configuration, or if it received only partial configuration.

In this case, the summary window displays the configured LRU or LRUs that it detects as being offline:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
The Crossfill Monitor waits indefinitely for crossfill to complete, but after 10 minutes it displays a message
advising the technician that something may be wrong.
Timed Out, But Still Watching
The wait has been at least 10 minutes and crossfill still has not completed:

User Cancels After Timeout

The Summary window on the System upload page will report what LRUs it still detected as unsynced at the
time the user cancelled. Normally PFD1 would not detect as unsynced, because the device which is uploading
is always considered to be synced with itself.

The listed LRUs would be the ones to check for the problems mentioned in the troubleshooting section. The
crossfill will still be ongoing even after the user cancels, though it will no longer be monitored.

Crossfill Completes After Timeout

Even though 'timeout' has occurred, crossfill still proceeds normally, and if the Crossfill Monitor detects that
the network has synced all of the 'config' tags, then it will still show a completion message, even after
timeout. This message will only be displayed if the user has not yet cancelled. Crossfill will still be ongoing
even after the user cancels, though it will no longer be monitored.

Page 8-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 NOTE
If the timeout has elapsed, an error has occurred and crossfill is not going to finish. The
technician should cancel, view the unsynced LRUs, and proceed with troubleshooting (unless
the decision is made to let it run as part of troubleshooting).
8.2.5.1 Crossfill Troubleshooting
Failure
Possible causes for this include the following:
x An LRU is not online or is not connected to the uploading LRU.
x An LRU is configured and should not be.
Possible Corrections:
x Turn on the offline device.
x Check the LRUs configured and see if one is configured and should not be so.
Timeout
Possible causes for this include the following:
x A connected device is not in config mode (either because it was never in config mode, or because it
did not restart in config mode after a software upload).
x Something else is preventing registry tags from appropriately crossfilling to at least one other device.
x Not all LRUs have the same software version.
Possible Corrections
x Ensure that all configured LRUs are on, and in config mode.
x Ensure that all online LRUs can be seen by the uploading device on the network (The System Status
page on the uploading device should show which ones it detects on the network.)
x Ensure that all LRUs have the same software version.
Timeout Problem Persists
x Pay special attention to the LRUs listed as being unsynced when the user cancels the monitoring
process (see ‘User cancels after timeout’ above).
x If after several attempts, the same LRU or LRUs are listed as being unsynced, it is likely that there is
something preventing those devices from crossfilling. Double-check that they are in config mode, and
have the same software version as the other LRUs.
x If after several attempts, different/random LRUs are listed as being unsynced, it is likely that there is a
registry tag that is changing too fast to ever be detected as 'synced'. For the technician, this means it
is likely that crossfill has truly completed, and there is just one or a small number of tags that are
changing quickly.
x The Crossfill Monitoring system is advisory (it doesn't perform crossfilling, it monitors) and crossfilling
proceeds normally, so waiting 10 minutes (which is the crossfill timeout time) still applies.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-5

190-01737-00 Revision A
8.2.6 Clearing User Settings
All user data must be cleared after a GDU software update and configuration load is performed. The following
procedures describe how to clear user settings for the system.
NOTE
Clearing user settings will remove user data including user waypoints, pilot selections, and
stored flight plans. If desired, stored flight plans (not user waypoints or pilot selections) can
be saved to an SD card. Refer to the 704GX Pilot’s Guide for instructions.
1. Remove power from the PFD by pulling the PFD circuit breaker. Repeat for the MFD.
2. While holding the CLR button on the PFD, reset the PFD circuit breaker. Repeat for the MFD.
3. When prompted to clear user settings (see figures below), press the YES softkey on each GDU .

4. The ‘User Settings Cleared’ message will be displayed (see figure below) on each GDU to verify that all
user data has been cleared.

Page 8-6 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
8.3 LOADING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
1. Ensure loader card is inserted into top card slot of the PFD. On the PFD, select the System Upload
page using the PFD small FMS knob. ‘Bell 407’ is displayed by default once the System Upload Page is
selected:

2. Press the FMS knob and activate the cursor. ‘Bell 407’ is highlighted:

3. Turn the small FMS knob to display a smaller window with Bell 407 highlighted:

4. Press ENT. Bell 407 is now highlighted in the ITEM window:

5. Turn the small FMS knob. A smaller window is displayed showing Bell 407:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-7

190-01737-00 Revision A
 NOTE
6. Press ENT. The PRODUCT window populates with the baseline software and configuration files:

7. The ‘LRU VERS’ column shows the currently loaded software version in the LRU, whereas the ‘CARD
VERS’ column shows the LRU software version stored on the loader card. Each check designates a file
to be loaded to the system. By default, if an inequality between the LRU and CARD columns exists, the
SOFTWARE and CONFIGURATION boxes will be preselected (checked). The following softkeys provide
an easy way to select files:
• CHK ALL: Selects all files, both configuration and software.
• CHK SW: Selects all SW files only.
• CHK CFG: Selects all configuration files only.
• CLR ALL: Clears all selections.

Page 8-8 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 NOTE
Leave all check boxes selected for a first time software and configuration load to a new
installation.
8. After making sure the desired software and configuration files are checked, press the LOAD softkey.
The system automatically begins loading software and default configuration files to the selected LRUs
in their proper order.
9. When the system finishes loading, it prompts the technician accordingly. Press the ENT key to
acknowledge that the upload is finished:

10. Verify that each column indicates in green when the loading process has finished and
inspect the SUMMARY window as well to ensure a successful load.
8.4 INSTALLING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Follow the procedures in Section 5 for installing any optional equipment files.
8.5 ENABLING OPTIONS
NOTE
ChartView databases are subscription-based and are to be procured by the aircraft owner
directly from Jeppesen. This procedure is only required if the ChartView option is
purchased by the customer.

NOTE
Once an enable SD card is utilized for a particular installation that card becomes locked
with the system ID for that aircraft. The enable cards must be retained for that aircraft
should there be a need to unlock the feature again in the field.
The system has various features that require the use of enable cards to activate the feature. In some cases,
the actual label on the physical card may say 'unlock'. If uncertain, the technician should verify the card part
number prior to use. Follow the procedure in this section to enable any of the following features:
x ChartView
x Heavy AC
x SAR

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-9

190-01737-00 Revision A
 1. Insert the enable card for the desired feature into the top slot of the PFD.
2. On the PFD, select the SYSTEM UPLOAD page.
3. Activate the cursor by pressing the FMS knob and rotate the inner knob to select the desired feature in
the GROUP window. Press ENT to select. Wait for the product window to load. Note: the product
window displays information about each system LRU, where “LRU VERS" is the currently installed
software version and "CARD VERS" is the software version of SD card.
4. Ensure all boxes are checked. Press the ‘LOAD’ softkey.
5. Observe the software loading process and verify the load completes without errors, as indicated by
the following: Green "Pass" or "N/A" in the "SOFTWARE and "CONFIGURATION" columns."UPLOAD
COMPLETE.....COMPLETE" in the summary window.
6. Press the PFD ENT key to acknowledge upload complete.
7. Deactivate the cursor.
8. Power down the system and removed the unlock card from the PFD.

Page 8-10 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
8.6 FINAL CONFIGURATION ITEMS
8.6.1 Aircraft Registration Number Entry
1. Select the AIRCRAFT TRANSPONDER CONFIGURATION page:

2. Activate the cursor and highlight the ‘ADDRESS’ field. Use the small/large FMS knobs to enter the
aircraft registration number. Once the correct registration number is entered, press the ENT key. The
transponder is configuring:

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-11

190-01737-00 Revision A
 3. The transponder then alerts the technician of complete configuration:

4. Press the ENT key on the PFD.

Page 8-12 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
8.7 SOFTWARE LOAD CONFIRMATION
1. Select the System Status page using the FMS knob. Activate the cursor and toggle to the LRU window:

2. Highlight each of the following item in the LRU window, and verify that the software part number and
version matches the information in the appropriate Bell drawing.
3. Deactivate the cursor.
NOTE
If any software version and/or part number does not match those specified by the Bell
General Arrangement Drawing, or if the software is not successfully loaded, DO NOT
continue with upload procedures. Troubleshoot and resolve the issue before
continuing.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-13

190-01737-00 Revision A
8.8 UPDATING THE CONFIGURATION MODULE
After completing all configuration and software loading procedures, restart the system in configuration mode
and update the configuration module by doing the following:
1. Select the System Upload Page.
2. Press the UPDT CFG softkey located in the lower right corner of the System Upload page.
3. ‘Update Config Module?’ is displayed.
4. Select YES and press the ENT key.
5. The system will update the configuration module located in the PFD connector and prompt the
technician when successfully complete. Press the ENT key to acknowledge the prompt.

Page 8-14 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
8.9 DATABASE CARD LOADING PROCEDURE
NOTE
Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during
the database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the
system.
NOTE
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic
flight operations, SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation
and ChartView database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the Perspective
System. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or Bell.
NOTE
When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD
card other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
NOTE
When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization
can be monitored on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page.
NOTE
Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on
the power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in
yellow.
NOTE
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database
information. These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure;
incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes; or any other displayed item used for
navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to FlyGarmin.com and select
“Aviation Data Error Report.
8.9.1 Jeppesen Databases
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a 14-
day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will no
longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen. The ChartView database
should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside in the bottom card slot on
the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user supplied SD data card.
Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE
The card can be removed after the navigation database is installed.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-15

190-01737-00 Revision A
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features)
1. With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top
card slot of the display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2. Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the
display:

Figure 8-2. Standby Navigation Database Prompt

3. Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4. A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.

Figure 8-3. Database Update Confirmation

5. After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the
display is starting.
6. Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other display (PFD or MFD). Remove the SD card when finished.
8. Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
9. Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

Page 8-16 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 10. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
11. Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show active navigation database information for each
display (MFD1 DB or PFD1 DB). Verify the correct active navigation database cycle information is
shown for each display.
8.9.2 Dual Navigation Database Feature
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date). If a
navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective. The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-
ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into
the active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes
approximately 45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV
DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
1. With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top
card slot of the MFD.
2. Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of the PFD and the MFD.
3. Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.

Figure 8-4. Standby Navigation Database Prompt

4. Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the
MFD.
5. After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, the display will appear as shown
in Figure 8-5.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-17

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Figure 8-5. Standby Navigation Database Update Complete
6. As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in
Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6. Navigation Database Verification Prompt

7. Press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7. Active Navigation Database Prompt

8. Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not
yet valid, it should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do
not remove power while the display is starting.
9. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
10. Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12. The new database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD. Progress can be
monitored in the SYNC STATUS field. When copying is finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed.
Page 8-18 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
 13. Turn system power OFF.
14. Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
15. Turn system power ON.
16. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
17. Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
18. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
19. Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for
each display (MFD1 DB or PFD1 DB). Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information
is shown for each display.
Garmin Databases
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Terrain
• Airport terrain
• Obstacle
• SafeTaxi
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-UKWIK)
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and
ultimately stored on two Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts, which is loaded on only
one card). Each Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card of each display as shown in Figure 8-8.
These cards must not be removed except to update the databases stored on each card.

Figure 8-8. Correct Database Locations

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-19
190-01737-00 Revision A
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit. The basemap database contains data for the topography
and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns. It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There
is no expiration date. The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database
contains increased resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and
have no expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This
database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE
The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies.
Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy
and completeness of the data.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides detailed information about airports and heliports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. The AOPA Airport Directory covers U.S. airports,
while the AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory coverage area may be worldwide or regional, depending on the
database purchased. Both AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases are updated every 56 days. The
SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle. The FliteCharts
database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If
not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
Automatic Database Synchronization Feature
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single SD
database card to the SD cards on the PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system
that does not already contain that database.
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle, Airport
Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are stored on the SD
card that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the navigation database
which is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and ChartView) which are
only required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download new databases to the
MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD(s).
NOTE
The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this
method. Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system
to a ground power source while performing the database synchronization.

Page 8-20 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section of
the Database Window (Figure 8-9). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up. An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized
databases will be used by the system.

Figure 8-9. AUX-System Status Page, Database Window

The Display Database Softkey (Figure 8-12) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon first
press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through all
databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will switch between PFD1 and MFD1.
Database status information in the Database Window will reflect the database of the selected display. After a
successful sync and restart, verify that the proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page
(Figure 8-9). If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the
affected display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure 8-10). If a synchronization
completes on one display, but an error occurs on the other, the error message will be displayed with the
affected display listed after it. When an error message (Table 7-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected
before the synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card
Full’ or ‘Err’ is shown.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-21

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Figure 8-10. Synchronization Error Message

Table 8-1. Database Synchronization Error Messages

Updating Garmin Databases
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (running Windows XP, Vista, 7, or 8)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-42, or -43) from the PFD and MFD
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data card, perform the following steps:
1. With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2. Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.
3. Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4. Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up
screen (Figure 8-11). When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, a ‘Verifying’ message may
be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.

Page 8-22 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 8-11. Database Information on the Power-up Screen
5. Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
6. Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8. Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching,
indicated by ‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure 8-10.
9. Remove and reapply power to the system.
10. Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12. Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1
DB or PFD1 DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each
display.

Figure 8-12. Display Database Softkey

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-23

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Figure 8-13. Check Database Cycle Number
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database. At
startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by each AHRS (GRS1
and optional GRS2). If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page, similar to Figure 8-13. Note, in the following example, GRS1 is the first AHRS to indicate
an update is available. In actuality, this is dependent on which AHRS is the first to report status to the system.
GRS2 may be displayed before GRS1. The order is not important, only that each AHRS be updated, if more
than one is installed.

Figure 8-14. GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt

Loading the magnetic field variation database update (single or dual AHRS):
1. With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure 8-14, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is
displayed as shown in Figure 8-15.

Page 8-24 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 Figure 8-15. Uploading Database to GRS1
2. If a single GRS is installed, the system is ready for use when the upload is complete. Otherwise,
continue the procedure to update the other GRS.
3. The system displays a prompt for the next GRS upload is displayed, as seen in Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-16. GRS2 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt

4. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-17.
5. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.

Figure 8-17. Uploading Database to GRS2

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-25

190-01737-00 Revision A
8.10 SOFTWARE/CONFIGURATION TROUBLESHOOTING
MFD or PFD Does Not Power Up
1. Ensure power is present at display backshell connector.
2. Replace display.
Software File Load Fails
1. Ensure that LRU is reporting data on the avionics status page (LRU is 'ONLINE'). Check data path
wiring as needed.
2. Restart MFD and PFD in Configuration Mode and retry software file load or try using a different card.
3. Ensure that the MFD is not touched during the loading process, unless explicitly instructed to do so.
4. Ensure that LRU part number is compatible with software version and Loader Card. Refer to approved
post-installation and/or maintenance data.
5. Replace LRU.
Configuration File Load Fails
1. Ensure that LRU is reporting data on the avionics status page (LRU is 'ONLINE'). Check data path
wiring as needed.
2. Restart MFD and PFD in Configuration Mode and retry configuration file load or try using a different
card.
3. Ensure that the MFD is not touched during the loading process, unless explicitly instructed to do so.
4. Ensure that LRU part number is compatible with software version and Loader Card. Refer to approved
post-installation and/or maintenance data.
5. Replace LRU.
GIA1 to 'LRU' Serial Data Path Not Working
1. Ensure GIA1 and GIA2 are configured correctly.
2. Check wiring, connectors and pins as needed.
3. Software File Mismatch Alert appears in lower right corner of PFD when started in normal mode
4. Ensure that proper software file part number and version were loaded to LRU.
5. Ensure that LRU part number is compatible with software version and Loader Card. Refer to approved
post-installation and/or maintenance data. Reload 'MANIFEST' configuration file to the PFD.
System In-Air Configuration Lockout
1. Verify the system is in configuration mode.
2. Retain the SD loader card in the PFD top SD card slot.
3. Press the following sequence on PFD. Key 12, Key 11, Key 10, Key 12
4. Verify the IN-AIR CONFIGURATION LOCKOUT annunciation is extinguished on the PFD.
5. Repeat steps for the MFD.

Page 8-26 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
Avionics Status Shows Amber Checkbox
1. Remove the respective LRU from its installation rack or remove the connectors from the unit.
2. Perform visual inspection of the connector to observe any bent pins or push back pins/sockets.
Repair as necessary.
3. Verify component is powered. Verify power and ground signals are present at the respective
connector.
4. Verify data bus lines are properly terminated and secure. Verify continuity by validating with an ohm
meter that wires ring end to end, and not to each other, and to aircraft ground/shields. Note- This
includes all HSDB connections and A429 connections between the Garmin components. A429 data
bus to third party LRU’s will not affect the software loading procedure.
5. Verify location configuration strapping wiring is present and valid (if applicable).
6. Verify all other configuration strapping wiring is present and valid.
Software Not Loading to LRU
1. Cycle power to the unit and retry loading software.
2. Disengage any redundant components and retry loading software. (i.e. Trouble loading GIA1,
disengage GIA2 CB)
3. Cycle aircraft power and start back up in software configuration mode and retry loading software.
4. Suspect wiring failure. Verify proper wiring and data bus communication to unit.
5. Verify boot block software is current.
6. Move suspect LRU to redundant location and reload software. Move suspect unit back to original
location when complete.
7. Remove and replace suspect LRU.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page 8-27

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Blank Page

Page 8-28 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00
 __________________________________________________________________

APPENDIX —LRU CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS

The tables in this section provide connector pinout information for the system.

A.1 GIA 63H INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT

P601 (COM)
View of J601 connector looking at unit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

Pin Pin Name I/O

RESERVED (UNSQUELCHED AUDIO TEST) --
1
COM UNSQUELCHED AUDIO OUTPUT (011-01105-4X ONLY) Out
2 RESERVED --
3 RESERVED --
4 COM MIC KEY* In
5 RESERVED --
6 RESERVED --
7 COM MIC AUDIO IN HI In
8 COM MIC AUDIO IN LO (GROUND) --
9 COM 500Ω AUDIO OUT HI Out
10 COM 500Ω AUDIO OUT LO Out
11 TRANSMIT INTERLOCK* In
12 COM REMOTE TRANSFER* In
13 COM DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
14 ON-SIDE COM MIC DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
15 SIGNAL GROUND --
16 RESERVED --
17 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
SPARE --
18
CROSS-SIDE COM MIC DIGITAL AUDIO IN (011-01105-2X/-3X/-4X ONLY) In
19 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
20 SPARE --
21 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
22 SPARE --
23 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
24 SPARE --
25 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
26 SPARE --
27 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
28 RESERVED --
29 RESERVED --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-1

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

30 POWER GROUND --
31 POWER GROUND --
32 RESERVED --
33 RESERVED --
34 COM SECONDARY TX INTERLOCK* (011-01105-4X ONLY) In
35 RESERVED --
36 RESERVED --
37 RESERVED --
38 RESERVED --
39 RESERVED --
40 RESERVED --
41 RESERVED --
42 RESERVED --
43 POWER GROUND --
44 POWER GROUND --

*Indicates Active Low (Ground to activate)

† Pin not currently supported

Page A-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
 __________________________________________________________________

P602 (VOR/ILS)
View of J602 connector looking at unit
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 44

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED --
2 RESERVED --
3 RESERVED --
4 RESERVED --
5 RESERVED --
6 RESERVED --
7 RESERVED --
8 RESERVED --
9 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED --
11 RESERVED --
12 RESERVED --
13 RESERVED --
14 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED --
16 VOR/LOC 500Ω AUDIO OUT HI Out
17 VOR/LOC 500Ω AUDIO OUT LO Out
18 RESERVED --
19 RESERVED --
20 RESERVED --
21 RESERVED --
22 SIGNAL GROUND --
23 RESERVED --
24 RESERVED --
25 RESERVED --
26 RESERVED --
27 RESERVED --
28 VOR/ILS REMOTE TRANSFER* In
29 RESERVED --
30 RESERVED --
31 RESERVED --
32 RESERVED --
33 RESERVED --
34 RESERVED --
35 RESERVED --
36 RESERVED --
37 RESERVED --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-3

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

38 RESERVED --
39 RESERVED --
40 RESERVED --
41 RESERVED --
42 RESERVED --
43 RESERVED --
44 RESERVED --
45 RESERVED --
46 RESERVED --
47 RESERVED --
48 RESERVED --
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
50 RESERVED --
51 SPARE --
52 SPARE --
53 RESERVED --
54 RESERVED --
55 RESERVED --
56 RESERVED --
57 RESERVED --
58 RESERVED --
59 VOR/LOC DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
60 SIGNAL GROUND --
61 POWER GROUND --
62 POWER GROUND --

*Indicates Active Low (Ground to activate)

† Pin not currently supported

Page A-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
 __________________________________________________________________

P603 (Main Serial)

View of J603 connector looking at unit
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED --
2 ETHERNET OUT A Out
3 ETHERNET OUT B Out
4 RS-485 4 A I/O
5 RS-485 4 A I/O
6 RS-485 4 B I/O
7 RS-485 4 B I/O
8 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 3 A In
9 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 3 B In
10 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 4 A In
11 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 4 B In
12 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 5 A In
13 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 5 B In
14 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 6 A In
15 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 6 B In
16 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7 A In
17 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 7 B In
18 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 8 A In
19 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 8 B In
20 CAN BUS 1 HI I/O
21 RESERVED --
22 CAN BUS 1 LO I/O
23 RS-485 1 A I/O
24 RS-485 1 B I/O
25 RS-485 2 A I/O
26 RS-485 2 B I/O
27 RS-485 3 A/RS-422 IN A I/O
28 RS-485 3 B/RS-422 IN B I/O
29 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 1 A In
30 CAN BUS 2 LO I/O
31 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 1 B In
32 CAN BUS 2 HI I/O

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-5

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

33 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 2 A In
34 CAN BUS 1 TERMINATION --
35 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 2 B In
36 RS-485 5 A/RS-422 OUT A I/O
37 RS-485 5 B/RS-422 OUT B I/O
38 RESERVED --

*Indicates Active Low (Ground to activate)

† Pin not currently supported

Page A-6 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

39 CAN BUS 2 TERMINATION --
40 RESERVED --
41 MAIN RS-232 IN 1 In
42 SIGNAL GROUND --
43 MAIN RS-232 OUT 1 Out
44 MAIN RS-232 IN 2 In
45 SIGNAL GROUND --
46 MAIN RS-232 OUT 2 Out
47 MAIN RS-232 IN 3 In
48 SIGNAL GROUND --
49 MAIN RS-232 OUT 3 Out
50 MAIN RS-232 IN 4 In
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
52 MAIN RS-232 OUT 4 Out
53 MAIN RS-232 IN 5 In
54 SIGNAL GROUND --
55 MAIN RS-232 OUT 5 Out
56 MAIN RS-232 IN 6 In
57 SIGNAL GROUND --
58 MAIN RS-232 OUT 6 Out
59 MAIN RS-232 IN 7 In
60 RESERVED --
61 SIGNAL GROUND --
62 MAIN RS-232 OUT 7 Out
63 MAIN RS-232 IN 8 In
64 SIGNAL GROUND --
65 MAIN RS-232 OUT 8 Out
66 RESERVED --
67 GPS PPS OUT Out
68 RESERVED --
69 VOICE ALERT DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
70 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
71 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
72 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out
73 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out
74 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out
75 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out
76 ETHERNET IN A In
77 ETHERNET IN B In
78 RESERVED --

*Indicates Active Low (Ground to activate)

† Pin not currently supported

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-7

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

P604 (MAIN DISCRETE)

View of J604 connector looking at unit

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 ANNUNCIATE* 22 Out
2 VOICE ALERT 500Ω AUDIO OUT HI Out
3 VOICE ALERT 500Ω AUDIO OUT LO Out
4 DISCRETE IN 13 In
5 DISCRETE IN 14 In
6 ANNUNCIATE* 1 Out
7 DISCRETE IN* 1 In
8 DISCRETE IN* 2 In
9 DISCRETE IN* 3 In
10 DISCRETE IN 15 In
11 AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT IN In
12 DISCRETE IN* 4 In
13 DISCRETE IN* 5 In
14 DISCRETE IN* 6 In
15 DISCRETE IN 16 In
16 DISCRETE IN 17 In
17 DISCRETE IN* 7 In
18 DISCRETE IN* 8 In
19 DISCRETE IN* 9 In
20 DISCRETE IN* 10 In
21 DISCRETE IN* 11 In
22 GIA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
23 GIA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
24 DISCRETE IN* 12 In
25 ANNUNCIATE* 2 Out
26 ANNUNCIATE* 3 Out
27 ANNUNCIATE* 4 Out
28 ANNUNCIATE* 5 Out
29 ANNUNCIATE* 6 Out
30 ANNUNCIATE* 7 Out
31 ANNUNCIATE* 8 Out
32 ANNUNCIATE* 9 Out
33 ANNUNCIATE* 10 Out
34 ANNUNCIATE* 11 Out

Page A-8 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

35 ANNUNCIATE* 12 Out
36 ANNUNCIATE* 13 Out
37 ANNUNCIATE* 14 Out
38 ANNUNCIATE* 15 Out
39 ANNUNCIATE* 16 Out
40 ANNUNCIATE* 17 Out
41 ANNUNCIATE* 18 Out
42 ANNUNCIATE* 19 Out
43 ANNUNCIATE* 20 Out
44 ANNUNCIATE* 21 Out

*Indicates Active Low (Ground to activate)

† Pin not currently supported

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-9

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

P605 (I/O #1)

View of J605 connector looking at unit
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RADAR ALTIMETER DC HI† In
2 RADAR ALTIMETER DC LO† In
3 DISCRETE IN 18A In
4 SPARE --
5 SPARE --
6 SPARE --
7 SPARE --
8 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH +UP In
9 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH +DOWN In
10 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL +RIGHT In
11 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL +LEFT In
12 DISCRETE IN 19A In
13 RESERVED --
14 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED --
16 DISCRETE IN 20A In
17 MAIN LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT Out
18 MAIN LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT (MAIN COMMON) Out
19 MAIN LATERAL +FLAG Out
20 MAIN LATERAL –FLAG (MAIN COMMON) Out
21 SPARE --
22 SPARE --
23 MAIN VERTICAL DEVIATION +UP Out
24 MAIN VERTICAL DEVIATION +DOWN (MAIN COMMON) Out
25 MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG Out
26 MAIN VERTICAL –FLAG (MAIN COMMON) Out
27 SPARE --
28 SPARE --
29 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
30 RESERVED --
31 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
32 POTENTIOMETER REF OUT HI Out
33 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In

Page A-10 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

34 POTENTIOMETER REF OUT LO (GROUND) Out
35 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
36 RESERVED --
37 DISCRETE IN* 1A In
38 DISCRETE IN* 2A In
39 DISCRETE IN* 3A In
40 DISCRETE IN* 4A In
41 DISCRETE IN* 5A In
42 DISCRETE IN* 6A In

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-11

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

43 DISCRETE IN* 7A In
44 DISCRETE IN* 8A In
45 DISCRETE IN* 9A In
46 DISCRETE IN* 10A In
47 DISCRETE OUT* 1A Out
48 SIGNAL GROUND --
49 DISCRETE IN* 11A In
50 DISCRETE IN 21A In
51 DISCRETE IN 22A In
52 DISCRETE IN* 12A In
53 DISCRETE IN* 13A In
54 DISCRETE IN* 14A In
55 DISCRETE IN* 15A In
56 RESERVED --
57 RESERVED --
58 RESERVED --
59 DISCRETE IN* 16A In
60 DISCRETE IN 23A In
61 SIGNAL GROUND --
62 MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG Out
63 MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG Out
64 SUPERFLAG 4A Out
65 SPARE --
66 SPARE --
67 SUPERFLAG 1A Out
68 DISCRETE OUT* 2A Out
69 DISCRETE OUT* 3A Out
70 DISCRETE OUT* 4A Out
71 ANNUNCIATE* 1A Out
72 ANNUNCIATE* 2A Out
73 DISCRETE IN* 17A In
74 DISCRETE IN 24A In
75 SUPERFLAG 2A Out
76 POWER GROUND --
77 SUPERFLAG 3A Out
78 POWER GROUND --

*Indicates Active Low (Ground to activate)

† Pin not currently supported

Page A-12 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
 __________________________________________________________________

P606 (I/O #2)

View of J606 connector looking at unit
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 26 VAC VERTICAL GYRO REF HI In
2 26 VAC VERTICAL GYRO REF LO In
3 26 VAC ADF REF HI† In
4 26 VAC ADF REF LO† In
5 RESERVED --
6 RESERVED --
7 RESERVED --
8 RESERVED --
9 SIGNAL GROUND --
10 ADF X/COS In
11 ADF Y/SIN In
12 ADF Z (GROUND) In
13 SIGNAL GROUND --
14 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED --
16 RESERVED --
17 SIGNAL GROUND --
18 PITCH ATTITUDE X In
19 PITCH ATTITUDE Y In
20 PITCH ATTITUDE Z (GROUND) In
21 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED --
23 RESERVED --
24 SIGNAL GROUND --
25 SPARE --
26 SPARE --
27 SPARE --
28 SPARE --
29 RESERVED --
30 SIGNAL GROUND --
31 RESERVED --
32 ADF DC REF IN In
33 RESERVED --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-13

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

34 ANALOG ROLL STEERING HI Out
35 RESERVED --
36 ANALOG ROLL STEERING LO (GROUND) Out
37 RESERVED --
38 RESERVED --
39 RESERVED --
40 AC ROLL ATTITUDE OUT HI† Out
41 AC ROLL ATTITUDE OUT LO (GROUND)† Out
42 AC PITCH ATTITUDE OUT HI† Out
43 AC PITCH ATTITUDE OUT LO (GROUND)† Out
44 YAW RATE +RIGHT† Out
45 YAW RATE +LEFT (GROUND)† Out
46 HEADING DATUM HI Out
47 HEADING DATUM LO (GROUND) Out
48 COURSE DATUM HI Out
49 COURSE DATUM LO (GROUND) Out
50 SIGNAL GROUND --
51 RESERVED --
52 RESERVED --
53 REMOTE ANNUNCIATE CLOCK In
54 REMOTE ANNUNCIATE DATA In
55 REMOTE ANNUNCIATE SYNC In
56 RESERVED --
57 RESERVED --
58 RESERVED --
59 MAIN KING SERIAL DME DATA I/O
60 MAIN KING SERIAL DME CLOCK I/O
61 RESERVED Out
62 MAIN KING SERIAL DME REQUEST Out
63 RESERVED --
64 RESERVED --
65 RESERVED --
66 RESERVED --
67 DISCRETE OUT* 1B Out
68 DISCRETE OUT* 2B Out
69 DISCRETE OUT* 3B Out
70 DISCRETE OUT* 4B Out
71 DISCRETE OUT* 5B Out
72 DISCRETE OUT* 6B Out
73 DISCRETE OUT* 7B Out
74 DISCRETE OUT* 8B Out
75 DISCRETE OUT* 9B Out
76 RESERVED --
77 DISCRETE OUT* 10B Out
78 RESERVED --
Page A-14 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

A.2 GDU 1040H PFD/MFD

J10001

View of J12001 connector from back of unit

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 44

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-15

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Page A-16 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-17

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Aircraft Power

Remote Power

Configuration

GDU System ID Program

Page A-18 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Configuration Module

Reversionary Mode

Demo Mode

Serial Data
RS-232

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-19

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

ARINC 429

Ethernet

Page A-20 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Lighting

Fan Monitor

Composite Video

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-21

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

A.3 GRS 77H AHRS

P771
View of J771 connector looking at unit

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
4 RESERVED --
5 SPARE --
6 GPS 2 RS-232 IN In
7 RESERVED --
8 SPARE RS-232 IN 1 In
9 MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT Out
10 MAGNETOMETER RS-232 OUT Out
11 GPS 1 RS-232 IN In
12 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out
13 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out
14 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
15 ARINC 429 IN 1 A In
16 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
17 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
18 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
19 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out
20 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
21 GPS 2 RS-232 OUT Out
22 POWER GROUND --
23 SPARE RS-232 OUT 1 Out
24 POWER GROUND --
25 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A In
26 GPS 1 RS-232 OUT Out
27 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out
28 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out
29 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
30 ARINC 429 IN 1 B In
31 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
32 SPARE --
33 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out
34 SPARE --
35 SIGNAL GROUND --

Page A-22 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

36 SPARE --
37 SIGNAL GROUND --
38 SIGNAL GROUND --
39 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B In
40 MAGNETOMETER GROUND --
41 SIGNAL GROUND --
42 SIGNAL GROUND --
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
44 SIGNAL GROUND --

A.4 GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER

P441
View of J441 connector looking at pigtail

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 SIGNAL GROUND --
2 RS-485 OUT B Out
3 SIGNAL GROUND --
4 RS-485 OUT A Out
5 SPARE --
6 POWER GROUND --
7 SPARE --
8 RS-232 IN In
9 +12 VDC POWER In

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-23

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

A.5 GDC 74H AIR DATA COMPUTER

P741
View of J741 connector looking at unit
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
2 OAT PROBE POWER OUT Out
3 OAT PROBE IN HI In
4 OAT PROBE IN LO In
5 SIGNAL GROUND --
6 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
7 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 DISCRETE IN* 6 In
9 SIGNAL GROUND --
10 RS-232 IN 1 In
11 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
12 SIGNAL GROUND --
13 RS-232 IN 2 In
14 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
15 SIGNAL GROUND --
16 RESERVED --
17 POWER GROUND --
18 POWER GROUND --
19 POWER GROUND --
20 POWER GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
22 SPARE --
23 ARINC 429 IN 1 A In
24 ARINC 429 IN 1 B In
25 SIGNAL GROUND --
26 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
27 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
28 SIGNAL GROUND --
29 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out
30 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out
31 SIGNAL GROUND --
32 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out
33 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out
34 SIGNAL GROUND --
35 ARINC 429 IN 2 A In
36 ARINC 429 IN 2 B In

Page A-24 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

37 SIGNAL GROUND --
38 SPARE --
39 SPARE --
40 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
41 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
42 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
44 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out
45 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out
48 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
50 DISCRETE IN 7 In
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
52 DISCRETE IN 8 In
53 SIGNAL GROUND --
54 SPARE --
55 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
56 SPARE --
57 SPARE --
58 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
59 SPARE --
60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
61 DISCRETE IN* 1 In
62 SIGNAL GROUND --
63 DISCRETE IN* 2 In
64 SIGNAL GROUND --
65 DISCRETE IN* 3 In
66 SIGNAL GROUND --
67 DISCRETE IN* 4 In
68 SIGNAL GROUND --
69 DISCRETE IN* 5 In
70 SIGNAL GROUND --
71 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
72 SIGNAL GROUND --
73 ARINC 429 IN 3 A In
74 ARINC 429 IN 3 B In
75 SIGNAL GROUND --
76 ARINC 429 IN 4 A In
77 ARINC 429 IN 4 B In
78 SIGNAL GROUND --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-25

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

A.6 GEA 71H ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT

P701
View of J701 connector looking at unit
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
2 DIGITAL IN* 1 In
3 DIGITAL IN* 2 In
4 SIGNAL GROUND --
5 RS-485 1 A I/O
6 RS-485 1 B I/O
7 RS-485 2 A I/O
8 RS-485 2 B I/O
9 GEA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
10 GEA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
11 TRANSDUCER POWER OUT LO (GROUND) --
12 TRANSDUCER POWER OUT LO (GROUND) --
13 TRANSDUCER POWER OUT LO (GROUND) --
14 +10 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT Out
15 +5 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT Out
16 +12 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT Out
17 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 6 HI In
18 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 6 LO In
19 SIGNAL GROUND --
20 POWER GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
22 ANALOG IN 1 HI In
23 ANALOG IN 1 LO In
24 ANALOG IN 2 HI In
25 ANALOG IN 2 LO In
26 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 1 HI In
27 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 1 LO In
28 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 2 HI In
29 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 2 LO In
30 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 3 HI In
31 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 3 LO In
32 SIGNAL GROUND --
33 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 4 HI In
34 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 4 LO In
35 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
36 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 5 HI In

Page A-26 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

37 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
38 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 5 LO In
39 SIGNAL GROUND --
40 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
41 DIGITAL IN* 3 In
42 ANALOG IN 3 HI In
43 ANALOG IN 3 LO In
44 ANALOG IN 4 HI In
45 ANALOG IN 4 LO In
46 ANALOG IN 5 HI In
47 ANALOG IN 5 LO In
48 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 7 HI In
49 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 7 LO In
50 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 8 HI In
51 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 8 LO In
52 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 9 HI In
53 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 9 LO In
54 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 10 HI In
55 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 10 LO In
56 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 11 HI In
57 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 11 LO In
58 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 12 HI In
59 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 12 LO In
60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
61 DIGITAL IN* 4 In
62 ANALOG IN 6 HI In
63 ANALOG IN 6 LO In
64 ANALOG IN 7 HI In
65 ANALOG IN 7 LO In
66 ANALOG IN 8 HI In
67 ANALOG IN 8 LO In
68 THERMOCOUPLE REF IN HI In
69 THERMOCOUPLE REF IN LO In
70 DISCRETE IN* 1 In
71 DISCRETE IN* 2 In
72 ANALOG IN 9 HI In
73 ANALOG IN 9 LO In
74 ANALOG IN 10 HI In
75 ANALOG IN 10 LO In
76 DISCRETE IN* 3 In
77 GEA REMOTE POWER OFF In
78 POWER GROUND --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-27

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

P702
View of J702 connector looking at unit
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 ANNUNCIATE* 1A Out
2 ANNUNCIATE* 2A Out
3 ANNUNCIATE* 3A Out
4 ANNUNCIATE* 4A Out
5 RESERVED --
6 RESERVED --
7 RESERVED --
8 RESERVED --
9 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED --
11 TRANSDUCER POWER OUT LO (GROUND) --
12 TRANSDUCER POWER OUT LO (GROUND) --
13 TRANSDUCER POWER OUT LO (GROUND) --
14 +10 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT A Out
15 +5 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT A Out
16 +12 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT A Out
17 RESERVED --
18 RESERVED --
19 RESERVED --
20 RESERVED --
21 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED --
23 RESERVED --
24 RESERVED --
25 DISCRETE IN* 11A In
26 DISCRETE IN* 12A In
27 DISCRETE IN* 13A In
28 DISCRETE IN* 14A In
29 DISCRETE IN* 15A In
30 DISCRETE IN* 16A In
31 SIGNAL GROUND --
32 SIGNAL GROUND --
33 SIGNAL GROUND --
34 SIGNAL GROUND --
35 SIGNAL GROUND --
36 SIGNAL GROUND --
37 SIGNAL GROUND --
38 SIGNAL GROUND --

Page A-28 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

39 SIGNAL GROUND --
40 DISCRETE IN* 17A In
41 DISCRETE IN* 18A In
42 DISCRETE IN* 19A In
43 DISCRETE IN* 20A In
44 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 1A HI In
45 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 1A LO In
46 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 2A HI In
47 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 2A LO In
48 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 3A HI In
49 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 3A LO In
50 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 4A HI In
51 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 4A LO In
52 ANALOG IN 1A HI In
53 ANALOG IN 1A LO In
54 ANALOG IN 2A HI In
55 ANALOG IN 2A LO In
56 ANALOG IN 3A HI In
57 ANALOG IN 3A LO In
58 ANALOG IN 4A HI In
59 ANALOG IN 4A LO In
60 DISCRETE IN* 1A In
61 DISCRETE IN* 2A In
62 DISCRETE IN* 3A In
63 DISCRETE IN* 4A In
64 DISCRETE IN* 5A In
65 DISCRETE IN* 6A In
66 DISCRETE IN* 7A In
67 DIGITAL IN* 5A In
68 DIGITAL IN* 6A In
69 DIGITAL IN* 7A In
70 DIGITAL IN* 8A In
71 DISCRETE IN* 8A In
72 DISCRETE IN* 9A In
73 DISCRETE IN* 10A In
74 DIGITAL IN* 1A In
75 DIGITAL IN* 2A In
76 DIGITAL IN* 3A In
77 DIGITAL IN* 4A In
78 SIGNAL GROUND --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-29

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

A.7 GMA 350H AUDIO PANEL

P3501

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 MARKER ANTENNA IN HI In
2 MARKER ANTENNA IN LO In
3 TEL AUDIO IN HI In
COM 3 AUDIO IN HI (GMA 350H Only) In
4 TEL AUDIO LO --
COM 3 AUDIO LO (GMA 350H Only) --
5 TEL AUDIO OUT HI Out
COM 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI (GMA 350H Only) Out
6 RESERVED --
COM 3 MIC KEY* OUT (GMA 350H Only) Out
7 AUX 2 AUDIO IN HI In
8 AUX 2 AUDIO IN LO --
9 COM 1 AUDIO IN HI In
10 COM 1 AUDIO LO --
11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out
12 COM 1 MIC KEY* OUT Out
13 COM 2 AUDIO IN HI In
14 COM 2 AUDIO LO --
15 COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out
16 RESERVED In
17 NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI In
NAV AUDIO IN HI (GMA 350H Traffic Only) In
18 NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO --
NAV AUDIO IN LO (GMA 350H Traffic Only) --
19 NAV 2 AUDIO IN HI In
TRFC AUDIO IN HI (GMA 350H Traffic Only) In
20 NAV 2 AUDIO IN LO --
TRFC AUDIO IN LO (GMA 350H Traffic Only) --
21 AUX 1 AUDIO IN HI In
22 AUX 1 AUDIO IN LO --
23 AUX 3 AUDIO IN HI In

Page A-30 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

24 COM ACTIVE* OUT Out

25 RESERVED --
TEL AUDIO IN HI (GMA 350H Only) In
26 RESERVED --
TEL AUDIO IN LO (GMA 350H Only) In
27 RESERVED --
TEL MIC OUT HI (GMA 350H Only) Out
28 RESERVED --
TEL MIC OUT LO (GMA 350H Only) Out
29 ALERT 3 AUDIO IN HI In
30 COM 2 MIC KEY* OUT Out

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-31

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

P3502

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out
2 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out
3 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out
4 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT RIGHT Out
5 LIGHTING BUS IN LO In
6 RESERVED --
7 LIGHTING BUS IN HI In
8 AIRCRAFT POWER In
9 AIRCRAFT POWER In
10 POWER GROUND --
11 POWER GROUND --
12 PA MUTE* OUT Out
13 PASS ICS KEY In
14 PASS ISO TOGGLE/ICS KEY* IN In
15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI In
16 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out
17 RS-232 IN In
18 RS-232 OUT Out
19 PA MODE SELECTED* OUT Out
20 COM SWAP* IN (GMA 350 Only) In
COM SWAP/CYCLE* IN (GMA 350H Only) In
21 RESERVED --
22 PLAY KEY* IN In
23 MUSIC 1 IN LEFT In
24 MUSIC 1 IN RIGHT In
25 MUSIC 1 IN LO In
26 RESERVED --
MUSIC 2 IN LEFT (GMA 350 Only) In
27 RESERVED --
MUSIC 2 IN RIGHT (GMA 350 Only) In
28 RESERVED --
MUSIC 2 IN LO (GMA 350 Only) In
29 FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI In
30 COPILOT PTC In
31 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT RIGHT Out

Page A-32 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

32 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI In
33 COPILOT MIC KEY* IN In
34 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO In
35 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
36 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
37 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
38 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
39 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
40 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
41 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
42 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
43 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO Out
44 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI Out

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-33

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Power
Aircraft Power

Serial Data
RS-232

Lighting

Page A-34 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Audio Inputs and Outputs

COM Audio Inputs and Outputs

NAV/TRFC Audio Inputs

Receiver Audio Inputs

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-35

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Page A-36 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

CAUTION
During failsafe mode both FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI and COM 1 AUDIO INPUT
are connected to the PILOT HEADSET LEFT OUTPUT. During this time the output of the
COM 1 radio and the output of the device connected to FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI
will become shorted together, potentially causing damage or interference. If the
FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI is used, it may be necessary to install summing resistors
in series between these sources and the inputs to the audio panel to protect the outputs

Speaker Outputs

Music Inputs

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-37

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Mic Keys

Marker Beacon

Page A-38 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

A.8 GTX 33H/ES TRANSPONDERS

P3301
View of J3301 connector looking at unit
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 44

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED --
2 ALTITUDE A1 In
3 ALTITUDE C2 In
4 ALTITUDE A2 In
5 ALTITUDE A4 In
6 ALTITUDE C4 In
7 ALTITUDE B1 In
8 ALTITUDE C1 In
9 ALTITUDE B2 In
10 ALTITUDE B4 In
11 ALTITUDE D4 In
12 EXTERNAL IDENT SELECT* In
13 EXTERNAL STANDBY SELECT* In
14 NOT USED In
15 AUDIO OUT HI Out
16 AUDIO OUT LO Out
17 SQUAT SWITCH IN In
18 RESERVED --
19 ALTITUDE ALERT ANNUNCIATE* Out
20 RESERVED --
21 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
22 RS-232 IN 1 In
23 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
24 RS-232 IN 2 In
25 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
26 ARINC 429 IN 3 A In
27 POWER GROUND --
28 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out
29 ARINC 429 IN 3 B In
30 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out
31 EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O I/O
32 ARINC 429 IN 1 A In
33 ARINC 429 IN 2 A In
34 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
35 ARINC 429 IN 1 B In

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-39

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

36 ARINC 429 IN 2 B In
37 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
38 RESERVED --
39 RESERVED --
40 SPARE --
41 CURRENT TEMPERATURE PROBE OUT Out
42 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
43 POWER GROUND --
44 CURRENT TEMPERATURE PROBE IN In
45 NOT USED In
46 TIS CONNECT SELECT* In
47 AUDIO MUTE SELECT* In
48 ARINC 429 IN 4 A In
49 ARINC 429 IN 4 B In
50 ALTITUDE COMMON (GROUND) In
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
52 RESERVED --
53 RESERVED --
54 XPDR REMOTE POWER OFF In
55 NOT USED --
56 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
57 NOT USED --
58 SIGNAL GROUND --
59 NOT USED --
60 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
61 NOT USED --
62 SWITCHED POWER OUT Out

Page A-40 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

A.9 GDL 69AH SATELLITE DATA LINK RECEIVER

P691
View of J691 connector from back of unit
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND Out
2 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
3 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
4 SIGNAL GROUND --
5 RS-232 IN 2 In
6 RS-232 IN 3 In
7 RS-232 IN 1 In
8 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
9 DATA LINK SYSTEM ID PROGRAM 1 In
10 DATA LINK SYSTEM ID PROGRAM 2 In
11 SIGNAL GROUND --
12 SPARE --
13 SIGNAL GROUND --
14 SPARE --
15 SPARE --
16 SPARE --
17 AUDIO OUT 1 LO Out
18 AUDIO OUT 1 RIGHT Out
19 AUDIO OUT 1 LEFT Out
20 POWER GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
22 ETHERNET IN 1 B In
23 ETHERNET IN 1 A In
24 ETHERNET OUT 1 B Out
25 ETHERNET OUT 1 A Out
26 ETHERNET IN 2 B In
27 ETHERNET IN 2 A In
28 ETHERNET OUT 2 B Out
29 ETHERNET OUT 2 A Out
30 ETHERNET IN 3 B In
31 ETHERNET IN 3 A In
32 ETHERNET OUT 3 B Out
33 ETHERNET OUT 3 A Out
34 SPARE --
35 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-41

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

36 SPARE --
37 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
38 SPARE --
39 SIGNAL GROUND --
40 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
41 SPARE --
42 SPARE --
43 SPARE --
44 SPARE --
45 SPARE --
46 SPARE --
47 SPARE --
48 SPARE --
49 SPARE --
50 SPARE --
51 SPARE --
52 RESERVED --
53 RESERVED --
54 RESERVED --
55 SPARE --
56 ETHERNET IN 4 B In
57 ETHERNET IN 4 A In
58 ETHERNET OUT 4 B Out
59 ETHERNET OUT 4 A Out
60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
61 AUDIO MUTE SELECT 1 In
62 AUDIO MUTE SELECT 2 In
63 AUDIO MUTE SELECT 3 In
64 AUDIO MUTE SELECT* 4 In
65 AUDIO MUTE SELECT* 5 In
66 AUDIO MUTE SELECT* 6 In
67 DISCRETE IN 2 In
68 DISCRETE IN 1 In
69 RESERVED --
70 AUDIO MUTE* In
71 CHANNEL INCREMENT* In
72 CHANNEL DECREMENT* In
73 VOLUME INCREMENT* In
74 VOLUME DECREMENT* In
75 SIGNAL GROUND --
76 SPARE --
77 DATA LINK REMOTE POWER OFF In
78 POWER GROUND In

Page A-42 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

A.10 GTS 800 TAS

P8001

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
2 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
3 RS-232 IN 1 In
4 SIGNAL GROUND --
5 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
6 RS-232 IN 2 In
7 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
9 RS-232 IN 3 In
10 SIGNAL GROUND --
11 RS-232 OUT 4 Out
12 RS-232 IN 4 In
13 SIGNAL GROUND --
14 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
15 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
16 ARINC 429 IN 1 A In
17 ARINC 429 IN 1 B In
18 SIGNAL GROUND --
19 GPS PPS 1 IN In
20 SIGNAL GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
22 SIGNAL GROUND --
23 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A Out
24 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B Out
25 ARINC 429 IN 2 A In
26 ARINC 429 IN 2 B In
27 SIGNAL GROUND --
28 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A Out
29 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B Out
30 ARINC 429 IN 3 A In
31 ARINC 429 IN 3 B In
32 SIGNAL GROUND --
33 ARINC 429 OUT 4 A Out
34 ARINC 429 OUT 4 B Out

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-43

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

35 ARINC 429 IN 4 A In
36 ARINC 429 IN 4 B In
37 RS-422 IN A In
38 RS-422 IN B In
39 SIGNAL GROUND --
40 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
41 SIGNAL GROUND --
42 ARINC 429 OUT 5 A Out
43 ARINC 429 OUT 5 B Out
44 ARINC 429 IN 5 A In
45 ARINC 429 IN 5 B In
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 ARINC 429 OUT 6 A Out
48 ARINC 429 OUT 6 B Out
49 ARINC 429 IN 6 A In
50 ARINC 429 IN 6 B In
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
52 ETHERNET OUT A Out
53 ETHERNET OUT B Out
54 ETHERNET IN A In
55 ETHERNET IN B In
56 SIGNAL GROUND --
57 RS-422 OUT A Out
58 RS-422 OUT B Out
59 SIGNAL GROUND --
60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
61 TOP PA/LNA DATA RS-422 OUT A Out
62 TOP PA/LNA DATA RS-422 OUT B Out
63 TOP PA/LNA DATA RS-422 IN A In
64 TOP PA/LNA DATA RS-422 IN B In
65 RESERVED (BOTTOM PA/LNA DATA RS-422 OUT A) --
66 RESERVED (BOTTOM PA/LNA DATA RS-422 OUT B) --
67 RESERVED (BOTTOM PA/LNA DATA RS-422 IN A) --
68 RESERVED (BOTTOM PA/LNA DATA RS-422 IN B) --
69 SPARE --
70 SPARE --
71 SPARE --
72 SPARE --
73 GPS PPS IN 2 HI In
74 GPS PPS IN 2 LO In
75 USB VBUS POWER In
76 USB DATA HI I/O
77 USB DATA LO I/O
78 USB GROUND --

Page A-44 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

P8002

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 SIGNAL GROUND --
2 RESERVED (DISCRETE IN* 2) --
3 RESERVED (DISCRETE IN* 3) --
4 RESERVED (DISCRETE IN* 4) --
5 SIGNAL GROUND --
6 AIR/GROUND* In
7 SPARE --
8 TRAFFIC DISPLAY 1 STATUS VALID* In
9 TRAFFIC DISPLAY 2 STATUS VALID* In
10 GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED* In
11 TA INHIBIT* 1 In
12 TA INHIBIT* 2 In
13 RESERVED (BOOT BLOCK MODE SELECT*) --
14 SELF TEST INHIBIT PROGRAM* In
15 TA INTRUDER DISPLAY LIMIT 16 PROGRAM* In
16 TA INTRUDER DISPLAY LIMIT 8 PROGRAM* In
17 TA INTRUDER DISPLAY LIMIT 4 PROGRAM* In
18 TA INTRUDER DISPLAY LIMIT 2 PROGRAM* In
19 TA INTRUDER DISPLAY LIMIT 1 PROGRAM* In
20 RESERVED (DATA RECORDER ENABLE*) --
21 SIGNAL GROUND --
22 RESERVED (RGS GETREADY) --
23 RESERVED (RGS Q0) --
24 RESERVED (RGS Q1) --
25 RESERVED (RGS TB) --
26 RESERVED (RGS MSC) --
27 RESERVED (RGS WS0) --
28 RESERVED (RGS WS1) --
29 RESERVED (RGS WS2) --
30 RESERVED (RGS WS3) --
31 RESERVED (RGS WS4) --
32 RESERVED (RGS WS5) --
33 RESERVED (RGS WS6) --
34 RESERVED (RGS WS7) --
35 RESERVED (RGS DO) --
36 RESERVED (RGS TT0) --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-45

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

37 RESERVED --
38 RESERVED --
39 SIGNAL GROUND --
40 SIGNAL GROUND --
41 HEADING X HI In
42 HEADING X LO (GROUND) --
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
44 HEADING Y HI In
45 HEADING Y LO (GROUND) --
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 SPARE --
48 EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O I/O
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
50 TA DISPLAY ENABLE* Out
51 AURAL TA ALERT* Out
52 SPARE --
53 VISUAL TA ALERT* Out
54 TRAFFIC SYSTEM STATUS VALID* Out
55 RESERVED --
56 RESERVED --
57 SIGNAL GROUND --
58 ALERT AUDIO OUT HI Out
59 ALERT AUDIO OUT LO Out
60 HEADING Z HI (GROUND) In
61 HEADING Z LO (GROUND) --
62 SIGNAL GROUND --
63 26 VAC HEADING REF HI In
64 26 VAC HEADING REF LO In
65 SIGNAL GROUND --
66 SPARE --
67 SPARE --
68 HEADING VALID In
69 HEADING VALID* In
70 SIGNAL GROUND --
71 ANALOG RADAR ALTIMETER HI In
72 ANALOG RADAR ALTIMETER LO In
73 SIGNAL GROUND --
74 SELF TEST INITIALIZE SELECT* In
75 TRAFFIC OPERATE/STANDBY* In
76 ANALOG RADAR ALTIMETER VALID In
77 SPARE --
78 SIGNAL GROUND --

Page A-46 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

P8003

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 POWER GROUND --
2 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
3 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
4 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
5 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
6 POWER GROUND --
7 +6 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT Out
8 +6 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT Out
9 RESERVED (+6 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT) --
10 RESERVED (+6 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT) --
11 POWER GROUND --
12 +35 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT Out
13 +35 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT Out
14 POWER GROUND --
15 -5 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT Out
16 -5 VDC PA/LNA POWER OUT Out
17 POWER GROUND --
18 TRAFFIC SYSTEM REMOTE POWER ON* In
19 POWER GROUND --
20 POWER GROUND --
21 POWER GROUND --
22 POWER GROUND --
23 POWER GROUND --
24 POWER GROUND --
25 POWER GROUND --
26 POWER GROUND --
27 POWER GROUND --
28 POWER GROUND --
29 POWER GROUND --
30 POWER GROUND --
31 POWER GROUND --
32 POWER GROUND --
33 POWER GROUND --
34 POWER GROUND --
35 POWER GROUND --
36 TRAFFIC SYSTEM REMOTE POWER OFF In
37 POWER GROUND --

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-47

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

A.11 GSR 56H IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER

P561 Connector

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 AUDIO OUT HI Out
2 AUDIO OUT LO Out
3 POWER GROUND --
4 AUDIO IN HI In
5 AUDIO IN LO In
6 POWER GROUND --
7 RESERVED --
8 RESERVED --
9 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED --
11 SIGNAL GROUND --
12 RS-232 OUT Out
13 RS-232 IN In
14 SIGNAL GROUND --
15 RESERVED --
16 IRIDIUM REMOTE POWER ON* In
17 POWER GROUND --
18 RESERVED --
19 POWER GROUND --
20 RESERVED --
21 HEATER POWER In
22 HEATER 1 HI --
23 POWER GROUND --
24 SPARE --
25 RESERVED --
26 RESERVED --
27 RESERVED --
28 RESERVED --
29 RESERVED --
30 RESERVED --
31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT Out
32 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
33 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
34 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
*Denotes Active Low (Ground to activate)

Page A-48 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

35 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
36 HEATER POWER In
37 HEATER 2 HI --
38 HEATER 1 LO --
39 RESERVED --
40 RESERVED --
41 RESERVED --
42 RESERVED --
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
44 RESERVED --
*Denotes Active Low (Ground to activate)

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-49

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

A.12 GDL 59H DATA LINK UNIT

J591

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Pin Pin Name I/O

1 USER ETHERNET OUT 5 A Out
2 USER ETHERNET IN 5 A In
3 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 2 A Out
4 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 2 A In
5 USER ETHERNET OUT 3 A Out
6 USER ETHERNET IN 3 A In
7 USER ETHERNET OUT 4 A Out
8 USER ETHERNET IN 4 A In
9 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 1 A Out
10 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 1 A In
11 SIGNAL GROUND --
12 SPARE --
13 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 2 HI In
14 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 2 HI Out
15 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 1 HI In
16 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 1 HI Out
17 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO IN HI In
18 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO OUT HI Out
19 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO IN HI In
20 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO OUT HI Out
21 USER ETHERNET OUT 5 B Out
22 USER ETHERNET IN 5 B In
23 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 2 B Out
24 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 2 B In
25 USER ETHERNET OUT 3 B Out
26 USER ETHERNET IN 3 B In
27 USER ETHERNET OUT 4 B Out
28 USER ETHERNET IN 4 B In
29 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 1 B Out
30 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 1 B In
31 SIGNAL GROUND --
32 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 2 LO In
33 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 2 LO Out
34 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 1 LO In

Page A-50 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
__________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

35 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 1 LO Out
36 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO IN LO In
37 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO OUT LO Out
38 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO IN LO In
39 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO OUT LO Out
40 RESERVED I/O
41 RESERVED --
42 RESERVED --
43 RESERVED --
44 SIGNAL GROUND --
45 SIGNAL GROUND --
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 RESERVED --
48 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
49 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
50 RESERVED --
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
52 POWER GROUND --
53 POWER GROUND --
54 POWER GROUND --
55 POWER GROUND --
56 IRIDIUM 1 STATUS DISCRETE 1* IN In
57 SPARE --
58 RESERVED --
59 POTS HANDSET RING I/O
60 RESERVED I/O
61 RESERVED In
62 RESERVED --
63 RS232 OUT 1 Out
64 RS232 IN 1 In
65 RS232 OUT 2 Out
66 RS232 IN 2 In
67 RESERVED --
68 RESERVED --
69 RESERVED --
70 RESERVED --
71 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
72 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
73 IRIDIUM 1 REMOTE POWER ON* Out
74 IRIDIUM 2 REMOTE POWER ON* Out
75 DATA LINK REMOTE POWER OFF In

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page A-51

190-01737-00 Rev. A
 __________________________________________________________________

Pin Pin Name I/O

76 IRIDIUM 2 STATUS DISCRETE* IN In
77 RESERVED --
78 POTS HANDSET TIP I/O

A.13 GSC 46 SIGNAL CONDITIONER (Sandia ST 32)

The ST 32 operates on 18-32.2Vdc. Power to ST 32 should be protected by a 1.5 amp breaker or circuit
protection can be shared with the display unit being interfaced (see installation manual of unit being
interfaced). All twisted pairs are #22 AWG. Power and ground are single wires and should be #22 AWG
or larger. Refer to the Sandia ST 32 Installation Manual P/N 305952-00 for interconnect drawings and
other information.

Page A-52 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Rev. A 190-01737-00
APPENDIX B — AFM/AFMS/POH CONSIDERATIONS
The following information may be published in the approved AFM, AFMS, and/or POH provided the system is
installed in accordance with AC 20-138A and is comprised of two TSO-C145a Class 3 approved Garmin GIA
63Ws, two/three TSO-C146a Class 3 approved Garmin GDU 1XXX Display Units, Garmin GA36 and GA37
antennas, and GPS software version 3.2 or later approved version:
NOTE
Text contained in brackets “[ ]” is meant to serve as an example and will need to be modified
in order to reflect the actual installation.
B.1 GARMIN GNSS (GPS/SBAS) NAVIGATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT APPROVALS
The Garmin GNSS navigation system installed in this aircraft is a GPS system with a Satellite Based
Augmentation System (SBAS) comprised of [two TSO-C145a Class 3 approved Garmin GIA 63Ws, TSO-C146a
Class 3 approved Garmin GDU 1XXX Display Units, Garmin GA36 and GA37 antennas, and GPS software version
3.2 or later approved version]. The Garmin GNSS navigation system in this aircraft is installed in accordance
with AC 20-138A.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the requirements of AC 20-138A
and is approved for navigation using GPS and SBAS (within the coverage of a Satellite Based Augmentation
System complying with ICAO Annex 10) for IFR en route, terminal area, and non-precision approach
operations (including those approaches titled “GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV (GPS)” approaches). The Garmin
GNSS navigation system installed in this aircraft is approved for approach procedures with vertical guidance
including “LPV” and “LNAV/VNAV”, within the U.S. National Airspace System.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the equipment requirements of
AC 90-105 and meets the equipment performance and functional requirements to conduct RNP terminal
departure and arrival procedures and RNP approach procedures without RF (radius to fix) legs. Part 91
subpart K, 121, 125, 129, and 135 operators require operational approval from the FAA.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the equipment requirements of
AC 90-100A for RNAV 2 and RNAV 1 operations. In accordance with AC 90-100A, Part 91 operators (except
subpart K) following the aircraft and training guidance in AC 90-100A are authorized to fly RNAV 2 and RNAV 1
procedures. Part 91 subpart K, 121, 125, 129, and 135 operators require operational approval from the FAA.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft has been found to comply with the
requirements for primary means of Class II navigation in oceanic and remote navigation (RNP-10) without
time limitations in accordance with AC 20-138A and FAA Order 8400.12A. The Garmin GNSS navigation system
can be used without reliance on other long-range navigation systems. This does not constitute an
operational approval.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft has been found to comply with the navigation
requirements for primary means of Class II navigation in oceanic and remote navigation (RNP-4) in
accordance with AC 20-138A and FAA Order 8400.33. The Garmin GNSS navigation system can be used
without reliance on other long-range navigation systems. Additional equipment may be required to obtain
operational approval to utilize RNP-4 performance. This does not constitute an operational approval.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the accuracy, integrity, and
continuity of function, and contains the minimum system functions required for PRNAV operations in
accordance with JAA Administrative & Guidance Material Section One: General Part 3: Temporary Guidance
Leaflets, Leaflet No 10 (JAA TGL-10 Rev 1). The GNSS navigation system has [two ETSO-145 / TSO-C145a Class
3 approved Garmin GIA 63Ws, and ETSO-146 / TSO-C146a Class 3 approved Garmin GDU 1XXX Display Units].
G1000H Maintenance Manual Page B-1
190-01737-00 Revision A
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the equipment requirements
for PRNAV and BRNAV operations in accordance with AC 90-96A and JAA TGL-10 Rev 1. This does not
constitute an operational approval.
Garmin International holds an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance with AC 20-153 for
database integrity, quality, and database management practices for the Navigation database. Pilots and
operators can view the LOA status at www.garmin.com > Aviation Databases > Type 2 LOA Status.
Navigation information is referenced to WGS-84 reference system.
B.2 GARMIN GNSS (GPS/SBAS) NAVIGATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The pilot must confirm at system initialization that the Navigation database is current.
Navigation database is expected to be current for the duration of the flight. If the AIRAC cycle will change
during flight, the pilot must ensure the accuracy of navigation data, including suitability of navigation
facilities used to define the routes and procedures for flight. If an amended chart affecting navigation data is
published for the procedure, the database must not be used to conduct the procedure.
GPS/SBAS based IFR enroute, oceanic, and terminal navigation is prohibited unless the pilot verifies and uses
a valid, compatible, and current Navigation database or verifies each waypoint for accuracy by reference to
current approved data.
Discrepancies that invalidate a procedure must be reported to Garmin International. The affected procedure
is prohibited from being flown using data from the Navigation database until a new Navigation database is
installed in the aircraft and verified that the discrepancy has been corrected. Contact information to report
Navigation database discrepancies can be found at www.garmin.com > Support > Contact Garmin Support >
Aviation. Pilots and operators can view navigation data base alerts at www.garmin.com > In the Air >
NavData Alerts.
For flight planning purposes, in areas where SBAS coverage is not available, the pilot must check RAIM
availability. Within the United States, RAIM availability can be determined using the Garmin WFDE Prediction
program, [part number 006-A0154-01 (included in trainer software) version 3.00 or later approved version
with GARMIN GA36 and GA37 antennas selected], or the FAA’s en route and terminal RAIM prediction website:
www.raimprediction.net, or by contacting a Flight Service Station.
Within Europe, RAIM availability can be determined using the Garmin WFDE Prediction program or Europe’s
AUGER GPS RAIM Prediction Tool at http://augur.ecacnav.com/augur/app/home. For other areas, use the
Garmin WFDE Prediction program. This requirement is not necessary if SBAS coverage is confirmed to be
available along the entire route of flight. The route planning and WFDE prediction program may be
downloaded from the Garmin website on the internet. For information on using the WFDE Prediction
Program, refer to Garmin WAAS FDE Prediction Program, part number 190-00643-01, ‘WFDE Prediction
Program Instructions’.
For flight planning purposes, operations within the U.S. National Airspace System on RNP and RNAV
procedures when SBAS signals are not available, the availability of GPS integrity RAIM shall be confirmed for
the intended route of flight. In the event of a predicted continuous loss of RAIM of more than five minutes for
any part of the intended route of flight, the flight should be delayed, canceled, or re-routed on a track where
RAIM requirements can be met.
For flight planning purposes for operations within European B-RNAV and P-RNAV airspace, if more than one
satellite is scheduled to be out of service, then the availability of GPS integrity RAIM shall be confirmed for the
intended flight (route and time). In the event of a predicted continuous loss of RAIM of more than five minutes
for any part of the intended flight, the flight should be delayed, canceled, or re-routed on a track where RAIM
requirements can be met.
Page B-2 G1000H Maintenance Manual
Revision A 190-01737-00
For flight planning purposes, operations where the route requires Class II navigation the aircraft’s operator or
pilot-in-command must use the Garmin WFDE Prediction program to demonstrate that there are no outages
on the specified route that would prevent the Garmin GNSS navigation system to provide primary means of
Class II navigation in oceanic and remote areas of operation that requires (RNP-10 or RNP-4) capability. If the
Garmin WFDE Prediction program indicates fault exclusion (FDE) availability will exceed 34 minutes in
accordance with FAA Order 8400.12A for RNP-10 requirements, or 25 minutes in accordance with FAA Order
8400.33 for RNP-4 requirements, then the operation must be rescheduled when FDE is available.
Both Garmin GPS navigation receivers must be operating and providing GPS navigation guidance to their
respective PFD for operations requiring RNP-4 performance.
North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum Navigational Performance Specifications (MNPS) Airspace operations per AC
91-49 and AC 120-33 require both GPS/SBAS receivers to be operating and receiving usable signals except for
routes requiring only one Long Range Navigation sensor. Each display computes an independent navigation
solution based on the on-side GPS sensor. However, either display will automatically revert to the cross-side
sensor if the on-side sensor fails or if the cross-side sensor is determined to be more accurate. [On G2000
installations a “BOTH ON GPS1” or “BOTH ON GPS2” message does not necessarily mean that one GPS has
failed. Refer to the MFD AUX-GPS STATUS page to determine the state of the unused GPS].
Whenever possible, RNP and RNAV routes including Standard Instrument Departures (SIDs) and Obstacle
Departure Procedures (ODPs), Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR), and enroute RNAV “Q” and RNAV “T” routes
should be loaded into the flight plan from the database in their entirety, rather than loading route waypoints
from the database into the flight plan individually. Selecting and inserting individual named fixes from the
database is permitted, provided all fixes along the published route to be flown are inserted. Manual entry of
waypoints using latitude/longitude or place/bearing is prohibited.
“GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV (GPS)” instrument approaches using the Garmin navigation systems are
prohibited unless the pilot verifies and uses the current Navigation database. GPS based instrument
approaches must be flown in accordance with an approved instrument approach procedure that is loaded
from the Navigation database.
Not all published Instrument Approach Procedures (IAP) are in the Navigation database. Pilots planning on
flying an RNAV instrument approach must ensure that the Navigation database contains the planned RNAV
Instrument Approach Procedure and that approach procedure must be loaded from the Navigation database
into the FMS flight plan by its name.
IFR non-precision approach approval using the GPS/SBAS sensor is limited to published approaches within
the U.S. National Airspace System. Approaches to airports in other airspace are not approved unless
authorized by the appropriate governing authority.
The navigation equipment required to join and fly an instrument approach procedure is indicated by the title
of the procedure and notes on the IAP chart. Use of the Garmin GPS/SBAS receivers to provide navigation
guidance during the final approach segment of an ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, MLS or any other type of
approach not approved for “or GPS” navigation is prohibited. When using the Garmin VOR/LOC/GS receivers
to fly the final approach segment, VOR/LOC/GS navigation data must be selected and presented on the CDI of
the pilot flying.
Navigation information is referenced to WGS-84 reference system, and should only be used where the
Aeronautical Information Publication (including electronic data and aeronautical charts) conform to WGS-84
or equivalent.

G1000H Maintenance Manual Page B-3

190-01737-00 Revision A
 Blank Page

Page B-4 G1000H Maintenance Manual

Revision A 190-01737-00